JP2020058900A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Game state setup means sets up one game state out of a plurality of game states including a first game state of facilitating discrimination by discrimination means, when a game ball is shot to a first route triggered by termination of a privilege game, and a second game state of facilitating discrimination by the discrimination means when a game ball is shot to a second route. Condition discrimination means discriminates whether or not a prescribed condition is satisfied by a game ball shot by shooting means after the one game state is set up. On the basis of the discrimination by the condition discrimination means that a prescribed condition is satisfied, performance execution means executes the specific performance in a mode of suggesting a route for facilitating the discrimination by the discrimination means as a route of shooting a game ball. This configuration exerts such an effect as to enhance a player's interest in the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. In some of the conventional game machines, at least a part of the winning is provided with a time saving state in which a start winning is likely to occur. Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided on the gaming board, and when the game time is shortened, some of the starting winning openings are likely to win a game ball. In this gaming machine, an advantageous state is dealt with by executing an effect (indicative effect) that suggests which starting winning opening should be played depending on whether or not the game is in a time saving state. It was hoped that the start winning hole would be announced in a suggestive manner, aiming to improve the player's interest.

JP, 2006-230825, A

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the suggestive effect is executed immediately after the winning is over, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the launching means capable of launching the game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through. 1 route, a 2nd route different from the 1st route, a 1st ball entering means which is arranged on the 1st route and can enter a game ball, and a 2nd route which is arranged on the 2nd route A sphere capable second ball entering means, a first ball entering means, or a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the discriminating means identifies Based on the result of the determination, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means are used as a trigger, When the game ball is launched into the first path, the determining means A plurality of at least a first game state in which the determination is easily performed and a second game state in which the determination by the determination unit is easily performed when a game ball is hit on the second route rather than the first route A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from the game state, and determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching means after the one game state is set by the game state setting means Based on the condition discriminating means and the condition discriminating means discriminating that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect of a mode for suggesting a route for facilitating the discrimination by the discriminating means as a route for launching a game ball. And a performance executing means for executing.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means, and the game ball compared to the first position A variable position variable to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball; and a variable control part changing the variable position from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, In the second game state, the specific condition is more easily established than in the first game state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is a gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the game ball can pass through, and a predetermined determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means. And the specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means, and the predetermined condition is set after the game state is set by the game state setting means. The game ball launched by the launching means is established when the game means passes through the passing means a specific number of times.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the passing means includes a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path. And are provided at least.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is the gaming state. It is established when the game ball launched by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the game state is set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and the first route thereof. A second path different from the first path is provided. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The condition determining means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching means after the game state setting means 1 sets the one game state, and the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. On the basis of this, the effect execution means executes the specific effect of a mode that suggests a path in which the determination means easily executes the determination as the path for launching the game ball.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine recited in claim 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the second ball as compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second game state is configured so that the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state.

  This has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed the passage means. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means has passed the passing means a specific number of times.

  This allows the player to shoot a ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, which has the effect of improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, as the passing means, the first passing means arranged on the first path and the first passing means arranged on the second path. Since at least two passing means are provided, it is possible to expect the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by launching the game ball to the route the player likes before the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball shot by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the playing state setting means.

  As a result, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the first route in the expectation that the first route that is easily discriminated by the discriminating means in the advantageous first game state is suggested by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize device of La-La section, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of variable winning a prize device. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of the flow path solenoid and the operation | movement of an opening-and-closing board in 1 of the big hit. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically correspondence relation between the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, (c) shows typically the correspondence relation between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the avoidance period in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting production in 2nd Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the launch direction notification production in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the latent probability return production in 2nd Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the first ball entry processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a large number of nails, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like are detachably attached from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. To support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Also, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entrance. When 67 is passed, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. When it becomes a special jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As a jackpot type of special symbols, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the jackpot ends, according to the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The two types of "big hit A and B" are big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of “big hit C, D” are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is achieved in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery executed when the player enters is referred to as the second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal design hits, the second ball entrance 640 is changed by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). It will be released. Note that, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, so the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, in the case of winning the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided as special jackpot types.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 round big hit). On the other hand, when the “big hit C” and the “big hit D” are reached, the special game state in which the number of rounds is 15 is achieved (15 round big hit). Further, after each jackpot is finished, as a value added after the jackpot is finished, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased after the jackpot is finished. In addition, if the specific conditions are satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes through a probability variation switch 65e3 described later), after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state (during a probability variation of the special symbol). When the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the high probability state of the special symbol, and the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased, continues after the jackpot ends until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends 50 times. . On the other hand, if the high-probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball did not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased is the variation of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. Will continue until 100 times.

  Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is up, so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probably changed state of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state It is a game state where it is easy to move to (big hit). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" (high probability state of the ordinary symbol) refers to a gaming state in which the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol" (low probability state of ordinary symbol). Indicates that the winning probability is low.

  After that, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot of the special symbol is called a probability variation period of the special symbol. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is called the time saving period of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period of being in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the time to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released at the time of one normal symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is set until the change of the special symbol ends 50 times after the big hit ends, The probability period of special symbols is not limited to 50 times, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. After that, it becomes a big hit, and when the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the "normal pattern normal state" shifts to a "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set “normal time saving state of the symbol” is continued after the jackpot is completed until the variable display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After the special symbol jackpot, if the special symbol lottery for 100 times is not completed and the new special symbol jackpot is not reached, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

  Then, when a new jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, the "ordinary symbol time saving state" is further special after 50 or 100 times from the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display of the symbols ends.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (special symbol according to big hits A to D) (First pattern) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a holding ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

  On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character moves. A notice production is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed on the lower half (second symbol). The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640. FIG. 8 exemplifies the case where four first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, is being performed, and is changed. As the stopped symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through either of the left and right normal ball entrances 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (second symbol) A variable display for alternately illuminating the symbols is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. . Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times, as in the case of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, but 3 times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is arranged on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flowing down from the right direction is You can enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter a ball into the second ball entrance 640, it is basically necessary to allow the flow path provided to the right of the variable display device unit 80 to flow down (so-called right hitting).

  A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass are provided. The game sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by flowing down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2). Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a ball. This special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the big hit, the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) and the ball is the special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can be flowed down is made different depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type.

  More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after the jackpot start regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot (opening period) is made variable according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. As a result, the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and the period during which the special discharge passage 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of the big hit, it is possible to perform the big hit game by paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the big hit game becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning a prize device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the variable winning device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for turning on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, the back cover body 65e, and the channel cover body. A switching member 65h projecting into the flow path formed by 5g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and a back surface arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and actuating the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k are covered from the back surface side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 5B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this structure, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first ball entrance 631 side. Is configured to. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 with the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with a special discharge flow path 65e2 and that is made up of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Also, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 0.2 seconds. There is. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the big hit. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is set in a range of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after the jackpot start and in a range of 3.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds. It operates and becomes a state in which the flow path leading to the probability variation switch 65e3 can pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge passage 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

  The game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be found early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, 15 balls for one ball is won). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot is variable according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state and the period during which it can flow down through the special discharge passage 65e2 is made variable. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the openings A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before the jackpot starts. That is, before the jackpot starts, the sphere is allowed to flow down into the normal discharge passage 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off-state continues for 0.5 seconds even after the jackpot has started (the opening period has come). Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. That is, the sphere can flow down to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

  When the 0.2 second ON state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again. This off-state period continues until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the jackpot was set). Then, after the lapse of the off-state period, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 2 seconds again (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can be passed), and thereafter kept in the off state until the jackpot ends. Be drunk

  Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when the opening A is set and the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, a ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, in one round of jackpot, 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, or the open / close plate 65f1 is set to an open state until 1 second has elapsed from the start of one round. To be done. Since it is difficult to enter 10 balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is basically opened for 1 second in the first round of the big hit. When one round is completed, the open / close plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Then, thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 30 seconds elapse after the round is started.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 0.2 second ON period of the passage solenoid 65k. However, there is a time lag until the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, the ball solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 0.2 seconds. Is difficult to proceed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the ball cannot reach the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so after the big hit, the low probability state of the special symbol is basically set. Even when the opening A is started, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at the same time as the start of one round, and the ball flows down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h. The sphere can be made to flow down to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 before the entrance of the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the probability changing state.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, when the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 3.5 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. It This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where the opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Then, after that, similarly to the jackpot in which the opening A is set, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k for 2 seconds. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be made to flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, the special symbol will be given after the big hit. It is possible to shift to the probable state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and the easiness of transition to the probable state is different according to the set opening type. In addition, the type of opening is configured to be selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), a big hit B or a big hit D, an opening A is set, and a big hit A or a big hit C is set. In the case of the opening, the opening B is set. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, whereas when the jackpot A or the jackpot C occurs, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the type of jackpot, it becomes easier or harder to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the special symbol shifts to the specially changed state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. , A fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entry. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball opening 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas includes a first The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the two-ball entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a sphere is common. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special The period is a high probability state of the symbol)) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 12 (a)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is a random number which is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit shows the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is in the first per random number table for low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12A). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See FIG. 12 (a). In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "10/400".

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the jackpot is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit C". When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot D”. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (for example, 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". In the low probability state, when the probability of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is assured, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / outside" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) are set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. . If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In addition, with respect to the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) is set in "198".

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out-of-front and out) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. Further, this second random number table is for a low probability of a normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (a high probability of a normal symbol). It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently (see FIG. 12C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random value that is a hit for a normal symbol, and the hit is "0". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol “” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds × 1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 3 times". To be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “1 second × 3 times”, but the opening time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. And a work area (work area) for storing values such as The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 31). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table. At least 202e is stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the big hit determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, 10 of "1-10" The judgment value is specified. If the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12 (a)), the special symbol It is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. Values are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, for the first special symbol, in the range of the value 0 to 49 of the first hit type counter C2, "big hit A" is associated and defined. . This jackpot A is a jackpot with eight rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 50, so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is a big hit type regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round).

  Further, "big hit B" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". This "big hit B" is a big hit with the number of rounds of 8 as in the "big hit A". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit B" is 50, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this "big hit B", if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball is the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it is not in the normal state at the time of winning, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, when the big hit B is in the normal state, it is difficult to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit, which is more disadvantageous to the player than when the big hit A is obtained in the normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, with respect to the second special symbol, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", "big hit C" is associated and defined. ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 50, so "big hit C" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected when the jackpot is selected in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the ball can easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the jackpot C is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

  Further, "big hit D" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". The “big hit D” is a big hit with 15 rounds, like the “big hit C”. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit D” is 50, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit D” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this "big hit D", if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball changes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning is in a state other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). If the "big hit D" is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large as in the "big hit C", and the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Will be advantageous to the person. On the other hand, if the player wins in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in the normal state, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A" or the "big hit C".

  In addition, the opening A is set when the "big hit D" is set in the normal state. In the normal state, an irregular game in which the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640 (struck right) This is to suppress the method. If it becomes "big hit D" in the lottery for the second special symbol, if it is configured so that the opening B is set even in the normal state (that is, if the jackpot is reached in the lottery for the second special symbol, the game is If it is configured such that the probability variation switch 65e3 can be easily passed regardless of the state), the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to transition to the probability variation state is set) of the first special symbol Rather than the lottery, there is a possibility that some players may find it more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the jackpot of the second special symbol in the normal state, the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol In the same way as when it becomes, the opening A, which is hard to shift to the probability changing state, is set at a rate of 50%. With such a configuration, by executing the lottery for the second special symbol even in the normal state, it is possible to invalidate the irregular game method for improving the rush rate in the probability variation state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state. You may comprise. As a result, even in the normal state, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent force against an irregular game method in which the player always hits right to try to execute the lottery for the second special symbol.

  The second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 12 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for winning the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to. , Ordinarily, it is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine a jackpot type and an opening type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot when a jackpot is hit. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, the opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, as the opening type determined when the big hit A, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, and, Normal symbol time saving state), and the probability variation state (probability variation state of the special symbol, and normal symbol time saving state), the opening B is defined in association with each. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the opening B that facilitates the transition from the opening selection table to the probability variation state is read and set, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, as the opening type determined when the jackpot B is decided, the opening A is defined for the normal state, and the opening B is defined for the time saving state and the probability variation state. Therefore, when the big hit B occurs in the time saving state or the probability variation state, the opening B is set so that the transition to the probability variation state is easy, but when the big hit B occurs in the normal state, the transition to the probability variation state occurs. The opening A, which is difficult to do, is set. Therefore, the jackpot B in the normal state is disadvantageous to the player.

  As in the case of the big hit A, the opening type determined when the big hit C becomes the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are defined in association with each other. Further, as in the case of the big hit B, the opening type determined in the case of the big hit D is associated with the opening A for the normal state and the opening B for the time saving state and the probability variation state. Has been done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the opening selection table 202e, the opening type is switched based on the type of the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit. More specifically, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), a big hit B or a big hit D, an opening A is set, and a big hit A or a big hit C is set. In the case of the opening, the opening B is set. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, whereas when the jackpot A or the jackpot C occurs, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the type of jackpot, it becomes easier or harder to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the special symbol shifts to the specially changed state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203o, a probability variation valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, a big hit flag 203s, and another memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number. The respective values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is an execution area. Is shifted (moved) to, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b, like the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reservation areas. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve And a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b Then, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls of variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S207 of FIG. 25).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S208 of FIG. 25, FIG. 27). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, every time the value of the first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is changed, the variable display held by the main control device 110 is displayed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). The value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 29: No). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. Shows that the probability variation state of the symbol, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the specially changed state of the special symbol, it is a time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it also indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and that the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, 50 is set at the end of the big hit (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Further, each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the value is subtracted by 1 (see S220 in FIG. 25). The probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

  This probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery based on the first random number table 202a for high probability On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is a time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 of FIG. 28). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability time. Based on the table 202c, the lottery for the normal symbols is performed, while if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0, the regular symbols based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time are used. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 of FIG. 28).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF when the jackpot is over (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. The configuration may be configured such that 203h is officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before power-off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round for the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1311 in FIG. 36). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303 in FIG. 36). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is determined whether or not it is done, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present embodiment, the passage solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds has passed since the jackpot start, and the passage solenoid 65k is set when 3.5 seconds has passed since the jackpot start. 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the big hit, and 2 seconds have been set when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the big hit. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203n, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( S1407 of FIG. 37). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even after the first round of the big jackpot with the opening A set is finished, the game ball is left illegally in the variable winning device 65, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 2 seconds. It is possible to suppress an irregularity that causes the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being improperly added.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is based on the channel solenoid 65k being ON, and is the probability variation switch. It is shown that the time is less than or equal to the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203p can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge passage 65e2 to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally put into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano is inserted from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a line or the like to allow it to pass therethrough, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1411 of FIG. 37).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. The time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving count shifts to 100 times.

  The big hit flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is ON, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the jackpot is not in jackpot. The big hit flag 203s becomes a big hit by a lottery for special symbols, and is set to ON when the big hit (special game state) is started (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), this jackpot flag 203s is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 25).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is for opening / closing the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 that closes or opens the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation contents instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability variation state flag 223e, a time saving state flag 223f, and a production counter 223g. The power-off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. The winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control device 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the variation effect suspended in the main controller 110 is retained. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is set by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It is designed to be managed on a case-by-case basis.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e is reserved. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and from the holding ball number command, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved sphere number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 of FIG. 40). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display hold ball number command is received, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number for the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probability variation state based on the probability variation state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, changing the rear surface type) according to the determined game state is performed.

  The time saving state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state of a normal symbol. The time saving state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state based on the time saving state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, changing the back surface type) according to the determined game state is performed.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when selecting various effects (back surface type, etc.). The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which the determined effect mode is defined for each value of the effect counter 223g. By using the effect counter 223g, various effects can be randomly selected and executed.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), the power-off flag 223y is set to be constant after the power-off flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a lapse timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored as a character ROM 234.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or designates it by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame on the basis of a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that the image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored at the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 18C. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if "the special symbol is out", it is shown in FIG. 18 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any concern that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in the back image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 19B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. . Further, FIG. 20 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 19, all images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. After being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is determined based on the rear surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 determines that the corresponding rear surface is First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 20, with the passage of time, in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing of the above.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range of FIG. 20A to FIG. 20B). ), And image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 20A and 20B) including the initial position thereof is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface E displays the images of FIGS. 20A and 20B using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20A to 20C so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20B to 20C and 20C to 20A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. This allows the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20B to 20C and 20C to 20A to be normally used while the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  It should be noted that, on the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be stored is redundantly stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, although the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 provides the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is going to a special game state and the large opening that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is about to start. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set as time passes. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. It is possible to create, because in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  Note that “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3605 in FIG. 54B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b In step S2303), the pointer update process (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 23), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing one frame of the image based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 45 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 of FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is turned off when the back image changing process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the back surface image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back surface image notified by the command is set to on in the back surface image determination flag 233x (FIG. 50 (a)). ) S3002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

  The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51), and the demo display data table is displayed. When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2705 of FIG. 47A, S2705 of FIG. 48A, S2805 of FIG. 48B). , S2905 in FIG. 49). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51), and the confirmed display data table other than the confirmed display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2505 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b), FIG. 49, S2905). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), the first symbol display. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S203). . Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is set (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (of the first special symbol) The variable display pending count N1) based on the lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S206).

  In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S207), and a reservation ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S212 or S209, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of a big hit D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S217: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes to set the opening command. (S1003). As a result, the big hit effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S217, if the lottery result this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If so (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the process of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S221). If the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is set to 1 The subtraction is performed (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the process of S220 becomes 0, or when the value of the time saving medium counter 203r subtracted by the process of S222 becomes 0. , Sets a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming status included in the status command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol storage sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment) together with the first symbol It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

  Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with each of the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that the special symbol is not in the probable state of change (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a first random number table for low probability time (see FIG. 12A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the big hit type is. . As described above, in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a big hit A (8 round big hit). However, if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit C (15 round big hit), If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed at 81, it is set whether it is the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, or the complete outreach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the starting winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by the various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning slot 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is When it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S411, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this processing ends and returns to the timer interrupt processing. .. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the second entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the value of which counter If is also 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol.

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because the special symbol big hit (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to try to win the specific winning opening 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the second specific winning opening 650a, from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 12 (c)).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "1-239", it is a deviation of the ordinary symbol. (See FIG. 12C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514), and if it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit now (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the processing of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S519), it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1). If it is determined that the above is the case (S519: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

  After the processing of S814 ends, the processing moves to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. After the process of S810 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. The special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric auditors product 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 The variable display is started at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 30 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 31) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14), the opening type according to the present big hit type and the current game state is set. It is determined (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when the opening A is set as the opening type, it is difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2, and thus it is difficult to set the probability variation state as the game state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the sphere easily flows down to the special discharge passage 65e2, so that the probability variation state is easily set as the game state after the big hit.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1007). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1007: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of the new round (S1008: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting process for setting the action of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this processing is ended. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1008, if it is not the start timing of the new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all the rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the present big hit (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is performed. It executes (S1014). The details of the winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1014) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning port (large opening) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1015), and this process is executed. finish. Details of this abnormality processing (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1013), and this process To finish. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the big hit operation setting process (S1009). The big hit operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening ports (the first large opening port 65a and the second large opening port 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotator 661.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening port 65a is set (S1102), and this processing is ended. To do. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), it is possible to accurately set the opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1013). This jackpot end processing (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 33) and, as described above, is a processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In this jackpot ending process (S1013), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, and therefore 50 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203g. By doing so, the probability variation state is set 50 times after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is finished from the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r after being updated in the process of S1202 or S1203. It is set (S1204). Next, the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1205), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If the winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the processing of S1302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1305), and if the round time has elapsed, (S1305: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the process of S1304 (S1304) and that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308). If the value of the motion counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is incremented by 1. The value is subtracted (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1308 that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1308: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. It is determined whether it is 2 seconds) (S1318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to S1310, and the process of monitoring the probability variation switch 65e3 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball splash. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a sphere by mistake and being given a probability variation state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to OFF (S1319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is executed. finish.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310), and if the sphere has not passed the probability variation switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and the process of S1313 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion counter 203k is 0 (S1313), and when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S1315), and the main The process ends.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1015). This abnormal process (S1015) is a process executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether or not it has been performed.

  In the abnormality processing (S1015), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is in the pitching period, and thus the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), this is left as it is. The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), the total of the number of discharged particles (the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharged number counter 203q) is then added. It is determined whether the value) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

  In the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegality in which a ball is illegally entered into the special ejection passage 65e2 and passes through the probability variation switch 54e3 while the special ejection passage 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are respectively reset (S1411), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 37), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a cannot be normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect the occurrence of such a failure early and notify it.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 38, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous blackout”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), the power-off process of S1616 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup processing this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S1616, It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1504, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 of FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the moment when the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after a general power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S1510, the probability variation status flag 223e and the time saving status flag 223f are updated according to the notification content of the status command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). . Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped even after the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed by S1508. Or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 to S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process moves to the process of S1611. In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S1613, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1615), and the power is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 39) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is next determined whether or not the holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). . When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol) is extracted, Is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). In the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203d, and the value of the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. Even if it deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d, and can be adjusted to the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability variation status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability variation state is notified based on the information according to the game state (whether or not the probability variation state) included in the state command, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the time saving state is notified. In this case, the time saving state flag 223f is set to ON, and when the normal state is notified, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are set to OFF. Accordingly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1709, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1709: No), whether or not the jackpot related command (any of the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command) has been received. It is determined whether or not (S1711). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related processing for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this processing is ended. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing ends. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot-related processing (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1801), and if an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 ends, the main jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 41) ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1803). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1803: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Yes (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1805, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1806). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1807), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1806, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this processing ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This fluctuation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40). In the process of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol. To be done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 56. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, the MPU 231 does not directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. , Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 of FIG. 43) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be surely transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S2102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. It is also possible to execute the processing of S2103 to S2105 after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102 and S2102.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 54A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)). The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When the main control unit 110 is through the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. The content of the image is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305). , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, other than out-of-front / outside) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 50, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation control having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2505), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, while the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the process of S2501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S2502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of 1., and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 23 beforehand From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2503 is used to measure the time of the fluctuating effect specified in the fluctuating display data table, and when the fluctuating effect in the fluctuating display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display stop type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / out, or complete disconnection) is dealt with. The stop type table is determined (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)) is executed, and the third value is compared. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2408), and If there is an opening command for use (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the opening command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S2705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2410), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S2805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the display command is displayed. If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S2905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits forming the back surface image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3002). ), The back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the changed back face is changed from each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is the back images B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2304), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S3002. From the above, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, when performing variable display, a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to change the rear surface type is performed. Since variable display has a variable time of at least 7 seconds, it does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, 2 Although there should be no case where the above-mentioned back image change command is stored, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the back image change command. . In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2417) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall person can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2416 (S2416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), And the processes of S2402 to S2418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer region, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 18, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 47B) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3201), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3202), and then S3203 to S3204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3301).

  In the task process (S2304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) forming the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are set for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  In the processing of S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3406), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S3206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalized display. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S3210), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect changes according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, the stop design of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop design determination flag set in S3215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are cleared by setting in the table buffer 233d (S3217) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3216, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table that specifies that the image (1) in FIG. 18B or (C) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is given to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Further, as a result of the processing in S3601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the processing proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702), and if it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the process of S3706 that the transfer process is not completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the on state of the back image determination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

  In the process of S3709, if the rear image change flag 233w is not turned on but is turned off (S3709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back face A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the normal video RAM 236. There is no image data to transfer to. Therefore, in the processing of S3711, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

  In the processing of S3713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The determination in the processing of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and it is easy to transition to the probability change state according to the set opening type (big hit of 1). The rate of ball entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2) is different. More specifically, an opening A in which the probability variation state is difficult to be imparted (the rate of ball entry into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is low) and the probability variation state is more likely to be imparted than the opening A (intrusion into the special discharge flow channel 65e2). Opening B with a high sphere rate is settable. Then, the type of opening is configured to be selected based on the type of jackpot and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is set in the normal state, the opening A is set, and when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is set, the opening B is set. There is. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 becomes low during the jackpot (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), while the jackpot A or the jackpot. When C is reached, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 is increased during the big hit (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to let the player play the game with the expectation that the jackpot A or the jackpot C with a high ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 will be achieved.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 is high during the jackpot (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to perform the game in each gaming state in the expectation that the jackpot will be won before the probability variation state or the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a feeling that it is necessary to win the jackpot in a limited number of special symbols drawn (probably changed times or shortened times). In addition, as expected, if a big hit occurs within the limited number of times of lottery, opening B is set surely, so at the time of the big hit, the peace of mind that the transition to the probability changing state is almost confirmed You can hold me.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to the ON state in the first round of the big hit so that the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow passage 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the path 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be set arbitrarily. In addition, in the rounds other than the first round, as a method of varying the ball entrance rate into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 by using the openings A and B, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round until the ball can be entered. The opening time of can be fixed. That is, as in the case of the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition of each round is defined as "2 seconds have passed as the specified time from the start of the round, or 10 balls have entered as the specified number of balls". You can leave it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) that makes it practically difficult to enter the specified number (10) of balls, each round will be surely continued until the specified time has elapsed. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be defined in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. With this configuration, it is possible to determine in a later round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player have a longer sense of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probability changing state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state. You may. As a result, even in the normal state, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent force against an irregular game method in which the player always hits right to try to execute the lottery for the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening A that starts the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible to pass the sphere to the probability variation switch 65e3 and the period in which the sphere can easily pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. Although the two types of opening B for starting the first round are provided, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the first round period may have a configuration in which an opening type that overlaps a part of the 2 seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state is provided.

  In the present embodiment, two types of ball entrances, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, are provided, but the ball entrance may be the first ball entrance 64 only. That is, you may comprise so that only the lottery of a 1st special symbol can be performed. Even with such a configuration, the opening B is set for both the jackpots A and B in the probability variation state, so it is possible to easily enter the probability variation entrance ball in the first round of the jackpot won in the probability variation state. it can. With this configuration, the second ball entrance 640 can be deleted, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 72. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the proportion of the high probability state of the special symbol is given for each gaming state (special in the jackpot) The rate of ball entry into the discharge channel 65e2) is different. More specifically, in the normal state, if the jackpot in the first special symbol is a big hit, and if the lottery in the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation state is given at 50% ( The opening B that increases the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined at a rate of 50%), and in a state other than the normal state, even when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, Even when the big prize is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% of the probability variation state is provided (the opening B at which the rate of entry into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is increased is determined to be 100%). As a result, in a state other than the normal state, even if the player mistakenly inserts a ball into the first ball entrance 64 and becomes a big hit, I was able to keep the same as the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence between the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot, and the determined opening type, the type of the time saving state is also changed. There is. Then, if the ball can be passed to the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot won in the normal state, a high probability state of a special symbol is given to the next jackpot in addition to the jackpot (that is, the jackpot is relatively large. Achieves a novel gameplay of 3 consecutive times in a short time).

  More specifically, it is configured to go back and forth among four game states (normal state, time saving state, latent probability state, and probability changing state) with a big hit or the like as a trigger. Of these, latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, and low probability state of ordinary symbols) and probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of ordinary symbols) and special symbols Since the high-probability state is set, there is a high possibility that another big hit will occur at short intervals, which is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol), the jackpot probability is low Therefore, it is disadvantageous to the player.

  Of the two advantageous game states (latent probability state and probability variation state), the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player. That is, as will be described in detail later, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically reset again or the probability changed state is set after the big hit. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. Further, the rate of resetting the latent probability state (looping the latent probability state) is higher than the rate of shifting to the probability varying state. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the probability changing state, in addition to the latent probability state and the probability changing state, the time may shift to a time saving state. In addition, as compared with the other two gaming states, the ratio of shifting to the time saving state is high. Therefore, the gaming state that is set after the jackpot in the latent probability state is basically advantageous to the player, but if the jackpot in the probability variation state is set, a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The percentage is high. Therefore, the latent state is more advantageous. As described above, in the second embodiment, the state transition is diversified and the player's interest is improved by providing a plurality of (two types) game states having different degrees of advantage.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration is that, with respect to the game board 13, the lottery result of the special symbol is part of a miss (small hit). In the case where a small hitting prize winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter the ball is provided, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially modified, and the main control A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, a small hitting prize winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the first entrance 64 in front view. At a substantially center portion of the small hitting prize winning device 650, a horizontally elongated rectangular small hitting prize winning opening 650a through which a ball can enter the inside of the small hitting prize winning device 650 is provided. When the ball hits the small hitting prize winning device 650, 10 prize balls are paid out. Further, the small hit winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit" which is one mode of miss. This small hit is selected in the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol) provided as one of the game states in the second embodiment, when it is out of alignment. It is easy to be done. In addition, since the small hit is one mode of disengagement, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

  As will be described later in detail, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when the special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the big hit type, the opening B is always set (the probability change switch 65e3 is easily moved by the ball. This is the most advantageous condition (passable). However, since it is a low probability state of a normal design, it becomes difficult to insert a ball into the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is necessary to play the game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to perform the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, it is necessary to play the game in the same game method as the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player. Under this circumstance, if the jackpot is controlled in the same way as in the normal state, the number of balls held will decrease until the jackpot is reached, despite the shift to an advantageous latent probability state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the small winning is likely to occur. That is, since the small hitting prize opening 650a is easily opened, a ball that is left-handed and has not entered the first winning entrance 64 becomes easier to enter the small hitting prize opening 650a. Therefore, the game in the latent state can be executed without reducing the number of balls held by the prize balls provided by the entering ball. The small hit winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds elapse or 10 balls enter) each time a small prize is drawn in the special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a firing direction notification effect will be described as an example of the display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The launch direction notification effect is an effect for informing the direction in which the player should hit the ball.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entrance to which the player should aim to perform the lottery for the special symbol) is different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal state, which is set to a low probability state of the normal symbol, and in the latent state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes lower than that in the time saving state, and the open period when the hit becomes short, Usually the variation time of the pattern becomes long. Therefore, even if a ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640, it is almost impossible to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. For this reason, in a normal state or a latent state, it is better to enter the ball into the first entrance 64 by performing a left-handed strike and execute a lottery for the first special symbol than to perform a right-handed strike. This is advantageous for the player (the amount of ball consumption can be reduced and the game can be played efficiently).

  On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol becomes higher than that of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the open period when the hit becomes long, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes short. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, by performing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing, the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed without reducing the number of balls held. Can be run. Therefore, in the probability changing state or the time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the ball right than to hit the ball left.

  In the second second embodiment, the firing direction of the ball, which is advantageous to the player, can be notified by a firing direction notification effect. By executing this launch direction notification effect, the player can easily understand the launch direction for efficiently playing the game, and the player can be notified of the current game state. . That is, when left-handedness is suggested, the gaming state is the normal state or latent probability state, and when right-handedness is suggested, the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current game state according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit and the content of the firing direction notification effect. In the present embodiment, the firing direction notification effect is not immediately executed after the jackpot is finished, but a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. With such a configuration, the player cannot specify the current game state until at least the specific condition is satisfied, so that the expectation that the advantageous state is set is continuously maintained. You can hold me.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol in the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the firing direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no balls have entered the left and right through gates 67). It is a figure showing an example (avoidance effect) of a display mode displayed on device 81. This avoidance effect and the above-described firing direction notification effect are basically executed after the jackpot ends when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is a display mode in a period (avoidance period) from when the big hit is started until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. A balloon 714 is displayed on the right side of. The balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the characters "Aim at the through gate!" Are displayed inside the balloon 714. This allows the player to shoot a ball by aiming at either of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right of the game board 13. It should be noted that the condition that "until the ball first passes through the through gate 67" is set as a normal symbol hit, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened. This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the right hitting in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous than the left hitting, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 by winning the ordinary symbol by lottery. This is because 640a is opened and the ball can be easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right respectively, the balls can enter the through gates 67 because the lottery for the normal symbols can be equally performed even when the player hits the ball right or left. Until the ball hits the normal pattern, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. Therefore, in a period in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further enhanced by adopting a configuration that avoids (delays) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. It can last a long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58B, a display mode of the firing direction notification effect executed when the latent probability state is given after the big hit will be described. As described above, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the big hit, it is detected that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the latent state, when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit, it is displayed on the small areas Ds 2 to Ds 3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to a character such as "Succeed in rush !! Left hit !!". Further, the display mode is set such that the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. This allows the player to easily recognize that the player has transitioned to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, if a player can play a game efficiently by performing left-handedness, the player can easily recognize it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), a display mode of the firing direction notification effect executed when the probability variation state is given after the jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the probability variation state, after the big hit, when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed and displayed. The character inside the balloon 714 present is changed to the character "Please strike right". In addition, the shape of the balloon 714 becomes a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the probability change state, which is more disadvantageous than the latent probability state, has been entered. In addition, if the player can play the game efficiently by executing the right-handed stroke, the player can easily recognize it.

  As described above, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds. Therefore, if the left gate is passed through the through gate 67, the firing direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed, and even if the normal symbol is hit, the variation of the ordinary symbol for 3 seconds By hitting the inside right, the ball can reach the second ball entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the latent state for a long time without damaging the player.

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot is continued to be executed after the jackpot is over, or the ordinary symbol is held during the jackpot. In order to prevent the holding ball from being digested after a big hit (suppression), the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). I am configuring. With this configuration, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the big hit, the fluctuation ends immediately, so that it is difficult to store the reserved balls of the normal pattern. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is 0, and it is possible to increase the possibility of being in the fluctuation stop state.

  If the variation of the normal symbol per hit at the end of the jackpot is in progress or is held, the player loses if the avoidance period is set despite the opening of the second entrance 640. Will end up. Therefore, the player may be dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that there is a reserved ball of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot is reduced. As a result, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the firing direction notification effect is not executed until the first ball hitting the through gate 67 is detected after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively execute the firing direction notification effect.

  Incidentally, in addition to shortening the variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol, in the ending period of the big hit, it may be configured to execute an ending effect of a mode instructing the player to stop the launch of the ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation where the variation of the normal symbol per hit at the end of the jackpot is in progress, or the variation of the ordinary symbol is suspended, so that the firing direction notification effect is executed more effectively. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), a latent probability return effect, which is one mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This latent probability recovery effect is an effect that is executed when the probability variation state moves to the latent probability state without passing the big hit. Here, the case of transitioning from the probability changing state to the latent probability state without passing the big hit is when the number of time saving times set in the probability changing state has ended. Specifically, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high probability state of special symbol continues until the next big hit. Then, the high-probability state of ordinary symbols ends in 50 times. Therefore, after the probability change state is set, if the special symbol lottery is not a big hit before the end of 50 times, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, and low of the normal symbol) Probability state). The latent probability restoration effect is an effect executed when the probability variation state is shifted to the latent probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latent probability return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed in the small areas Ds 2 to Ds 3 of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as “latent probability”. "Return !! Left-handed !!" Further, the display mode is set such that the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. With this display mode, the player can easily understand that the most favorable latent state has been restored.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, the shooting direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the through direction 67 may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect based on the first passage after the jackpot finish on the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13. Then, during the avoidance period, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting aiming at the through gate 67 on the left side. With this configuration, when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible for the player to perform left-handed striking to easily enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. In addition, even if the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probable change state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left-side through gate 67 is a win, after confirming the launch notification effect, the right Even if the player hits, the variation time of the length that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 sufficiently before the electric accessory 640a is opened is set, so that the player is lost. You can play without playing. In this case, during the jackpot ending period, the ending effect may be configured to suggest returning to the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from hitting the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and it is possible to perform a left hit before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to lose more easily.

  Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the jackpot winning prize opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning prize winning opening 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Good. With such a configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit left in order to put the ball into the small hit winning hole 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 (prize). You can Therefore, since it is possible to perform a left-handed stroke before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the player is less likely to lose. It should be noted that instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated entrance (trial entrance) for triggering execution of the firing direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the left through gate 67.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hitting random number table 202f and a time saving type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Has been. Further, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e are changed. The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, similarly to the first embodiment, a determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot types of “jackpot E” to “jackpot L” are provided. Among these, "big hit EH" is a big hit type that can be determined by lottery of the first special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. In addition, "big hit I-L" is a big hit type that can be determined by lottery of the second special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types also has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. This diversifies the pattern of game play.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the big hit of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 24". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 25 counter values that are "big hit E", when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit E". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the game state and the number of times saved will be described later.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can have, since there are 50 counter values that are "big hits F", when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hits F". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, "big hit G" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75 to 89". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 15 counter values that are “big hit G”, when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes “big hit G” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, "big hit H" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "90 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit H" is 10, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit H". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  On the other hand, in the big hit of the second special symbol, the "big hit I" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 24". Of the 100 possible counter values for the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that result in a "big hit I", so if the big prize is drawn in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit I". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, "big hit J" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "25 to 74". Of the 100 possible counter values for the first hit type counter C2, since there are 50 counter values that are “big hit J”, when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes “big hit J”. The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

  Further, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit K" is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 15 counter values that are "big hit K", when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit K". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, "big hit L" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "90 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit L" is 10, so when the big hit is in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is "big hit L". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, but in the present embodiment, a combination of the opening type determined using these eight types of jackpots and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. However, they are configured differently. This diversifies the pattern of game play.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described. Like the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine a jackpot type and an opening type according to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. .

  As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is provided with respect to the latent probability state and the probability variation state. It is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the big hit E in the normal state or the time saving state, it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is achieved in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is achieved, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening B is associated with the probability variation state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F in the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit G is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening A is associated with the probability variation state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot G in the probability changing state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit G occurs in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot H is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is defined in association with the latent probability state and the probability variation state. ing. Therefore, when the jackpot H in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot H is achieved in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, with respect to the “big hit I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as that of the “big hit E to H” is defined. Here, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, by changing the type of opening set, the proportion of the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is given to the gaming state. It can be changed accordingly.

  Next, the details of the small hitting random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not it is a small hit when it is missed in the lottery of the special symbol, and a counter value (random number value) which is a small hit for each gaming state. Is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, “0, 11 to 399” is associated with the counter value (random number value) that is a small hit in the latent state. Of the 400 possible counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, since there are 390 counter values that are small wins, when the special symbol lottery is executed in a latent state, the probability of a small win is 39 / 40 (390/400). For this reason, in the latent probability state, when the special symbol lottery is executed, it is highly probable that a small hit occurs, and the ball easily enters the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state in which it is necessary to hit left, it is possible to play a game without reducing the number of balls held by the prize balls provided by entering the small hitting prize hole 650a. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to entertain the game without worrying about the ball to be held. Therefore, the interest of the player in the latent state of the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, there is no counter value (random number value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a special symbol is drawn, it does not result in a small win.

  Next, the details of the time saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The time saving type selection table 202g is shown in FIG. 63, which shows the specified contents of the time saving type selection table 202g. This time saving type selection table 202g is used to select the type of jackpot and the number of saving times according to the game state at the time of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the jackpot E is set, 50 times are defined in association with the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state. As mentioned above, when the jackpot E in the time saving state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. In addition, when the big hit E in the latent probability state and the probability change state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and of the normal symbol. High probability state. That is, when the jackpot E is hit in the latent probability state, the probability shifts to a probability variation state, which is less advantageous than the latent probability state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is hit in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped. In addition, for the normal state, the number of times to save time is not specified (that is, 0 times to save time is set). As mentioned above, when the jackpot E in the normal state, the opening B, which is difficult to be given the high probability state of the special symbol, is set, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the jackpot F is set, 50 is defined in association with the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot F in the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot F is achieved in the probability changing state, the advantageous probability changing state shifts to the disadvantageous time saving state. Therefore, when the jackpot F is achieved in the probability changing state, it is disadvantageous to the player. Moreover, the number of times of time saving is not defined for the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state. As described above, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the big hit F in the latent state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, And, it becomes a low probability state of a normal design. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, the latent state is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the big hit G is set, 100 times are defined in association with the time saving state and the probability variation state. As mentioned above, when the big hit G in the time saving state and the probability change state, the opening A that is difficult to be given the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol It becomes a high probability state of. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the time-shortening state, the hour-shortening state is looped, and when the jackpot G is obtained in the advantageous probability changing state, it is shifted to the disadvantageous time-shortening state. In addition, the number of shortening times is not specified for the normal state and the latent probability state. As described above, when the jackpot G in the normal state, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to the opening A, which is hard to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, the normal state is looped. On the other hand, when the big hit G in the latent probability state, the opening B that is likely to be given the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Become. That is, when the jackpot G is hit in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions to be given when the jackpot H is set, 20 times are defined in association with the time reduction state. As mentioned above, when the jackpot H in the time saving state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes Therefore, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. On the other hand, the time saving frequency is not defined for the normal state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot H in the normal state, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to the opening A that is difficult to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, the normal state is looped. In addition, when the latent probability state, and the big hit H in the probability change state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and of the normal symbol. It is in a low probability state. That is, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent probability state and the probability variation state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, with respect to the “big hit I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as that of the “big hit E to H” is defined. Here, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time saving provided after the jackpot is made to differ depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. As a result, advantageous jackpot types are changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect different jackpot types according to the game state, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a winning state storage area 203t and a first-time entry flag 203s in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, a probability variation flag 203u is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment.

  The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u indicating whether or not the probability variation state is present at the start of the jackpot, and the time saving medium counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time savings are reset. For this reason, it is impossible to specify the state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (when newly setting the number of hours to be shortened) from the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the medium-shortening counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving / measuring counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t, and then these are reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). . Then, at the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of jackpot winning is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of hours saved is selected from the hour / hour type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately set the number of hours saved from the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the number of probability changes is limited to 50 times, but in the second embodiment, the number of probability changes becomes indefinite. Therefore, in place of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, a probability variation counter 203u is provided, and if the probability variation flag 203u is on, a high probability state of a special symbol, if it is off, a low probability state of a special symbol is configured. And The probability variation flag 203u is set to ON if the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1211 in FIG. 69). Also, it is set off at the start of the jackpot.

  The first-time entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not it is an avoidance period (a state where the first entry into the through gate 67 has not been completed) set after the jackpot is over. When the ball entering the through gate 67 is detected while the first ball entry flag 203s is on, the first ball entry command is set from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 68). (See S612). In the voice lamp control device 113, when the first ball entry command is received, and when the special symbol has a high probability state, the firing suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) is executed. . The first-time entry flag 203s is set to ON when the jackpot is over (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF after setting the first-time entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the game state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, any one of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state is set with the end of the jackpot or the end of the number of times shortened. It The normal state and the time saving state have a low probability of a big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. Among these, in the time saving state, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the game can be efficiently played by performing a right hit, so the time saving state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state have a high probability of a big hit, and are highly likely to be a big hit continuously in a short period, which is advantageous for the player. Among them, in the latent probability state, since the opening B is set regardless of the type of jackpot, it is more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state in which the opening A is set for a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state.

  First, a method of shifting the game state to the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state set when the pachinko machine 10 is initially set, and is basically a gaming state in which the player stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, there is a possibility that another gaming state will be set when the big hit occurs. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% in the case where the jackpot in the first special symbol is a jackpot, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and the time saving period is not given (Fig. 63), and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the latent probability state is set after the big hit. On the other hand, in the case of other jackpot types (jackpots E to H) that can be determined by special symbol lottery, the opening A is determined in which it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2 (FIG. 61). However, since the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the big hit. Even in the case of the big hit F, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 because the ball is not hit in the first round. On the other hand, even when the big hits E to H occur, if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent probability state after the big hit.

  Next, a method of shifting the game state to the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, similarly to the normal state, another gaming state may be set when the big hit is used as a trigger. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and 50 time saving periods are given. Since the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability variation state is set after the big hit. That is, it falls to a state where the degree of advantage is small (rank down). On the other hand, when other jackpot types (big hits F, G, H) are set, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but since the short-time period is not given (see FIG. 63), the sphere is changed to the probability change switch during the jackpot. By passing 65e3, the latent probability state is set again after the big hit. That is, the most probable latent state for the player is looped. In this way, the latent probability state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit occurs and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not hit in the first round of the big hit E, the state shifts to a time saving state after the big hit. Similarly, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hits F, G, and H, the player falls to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, a method of shifting the game state in the probability variation state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probability change state, not only the jackpot is used as a trigger to shift to another gaming state, but also a trigger other than jackpot (when the shortened number of times ends) shifts to another gaming state. .. Specifically, if the jackpot J, K is determined to be 65% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the second special symbol, it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and a short-time period of 50 times or 100 times is given according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot L is decided at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (FIG. 63), and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the latent probability state is set after the big hit. That is, it is possible to return from the probability variation state in which the advantage degree is small to the most advantageous latent probability state. Also, in the probability variation state, if the set 50 time-saving period can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row), the latent state is the same as when the jackpot L is achieved. Can be returned to. If it is possible to return to the latent probability state, the opening B is always set at the next big hit, which means that the number of big hits is substantially increased by at least one. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, even if you fall from the latent probability state to the probability variation state, expect the game to return to the latent probability state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in playing the game in the probability change state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and a short time period of 50 times is given. (See Figure 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is basically looped.

  In this way, in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the shortened time state, but when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot shifts to the shortened time state with a high probability (65%) and a low jackpot probability. Will end up. Therefore, in the probability changing state, a game can be played with the expectation that the time saving period ends and the state returns to the latent probability state rather than a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game can be played with the expectation that the special symbol will be continuously missed. In addition, when the jackpot J or K occurs in the probability changing state, it is possible to shift to the time saving state instead of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal state, so after the latent probability state and probability variation state loops are completed. Can at least remind the player to continue playing until at least the short time period has expired. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state in the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65, in the time saving state, not only the jackpot is used as a trigger to shift to another game state, but also the trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of hours saving is finished) The game state shifts to.

  Specifically, when it becomes a jackpot J determined at a rate of 50% when it becomes a jackpot determined by lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is Not given (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is achieved in the time saving state, the state is basically shifted to the most advantageous latent probability state. Further, in the time saving state, when the time saving period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpots I, K, and L are obtained by lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61), and depending on the jackpot type, 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times. Is set (see FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L that are won during the time saving state are completed, basically the time saving state is looped.

  In this way, when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the time saving state is looped, the time saving period set as that time saving state ends. Until at least the player can be reminded to continue the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the game moves to the latent state after the big hit, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, by changing the rate at which the opening B is set according to the game state, the rate at which the high probability state of the special symbol is given according to the game state is changed. There is. This makes it possible to provide a latent state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the jackpot is over. As a result, when the jackpot F in the normal state is reached and the game moves to the latent probability state, the jackpot F, the jackpot E in the latent probability state that moves after the jackpot F, and the probability change that follows the jackpot E. A total of three jackpots with jackpot J or K in the state will be guaranteed. Therefore, once the player is in the latent state, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction by guaranteeing at least three jackpots.

  In addition, the latent probability state loops the same state with a high probability (75%) when a big hit occurs, so if it is possible to shift from the normal state to the latent probability state, it is a big hit and a latent probability with a high jackpot probability. It becomes easy to repeat the state and. Therefore, since it is possible to expect a larger amount of prize balls to be obtained, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, even if the jackpot E becomes a big hit in the latent probability state and the player falls to the probability variation state, if the disengagement can be continued 50 times in the probability variation state, it is possible to return to the latent probability state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect continuous disengagement in the probability changing state, novel playability can be provided.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is the same as the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 25), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern and the like.

  In each of S201 to S218 and S221 to S223 of the variation start process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and The same processing as each processing of S221 to S223 is executed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the process of S216 ends, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, and if it is a small hit, it is small. The small hit determination process for starting the hit is executed (S231), and the process proceeds to S217. Details of this small hitting determination processing (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in the processing of S217, when the lottery result of this special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S217: Yes), the value of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving medium counter 203r is stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process proceeds to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the big jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot can be accurately determined and an appropriate time saving period can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the above-mentioned small hit determination process (S231) will be described. In this small hitting determination process, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S241). In the processing of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small hitting prize opening 650a, it is set so that a ball can enter the small hitting prize winning device 650. After the processing of S242, this processing is terminated and returns to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the present process is directly terminated.

  By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small hit winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent probability state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ball-holding performance in the most advantageous latent probability state, so that the player's motivation for the game in the latent probability state can be improved.

  Next, the through gate passage process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. This through gate passage process 2 (S112) is a process that is executed in place of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the through gate passage process (see FIG. 29). This is processing for detecting passage of a sphere to 67 and executing corresponding control.

  Of the through gate passage processing 2 (S112) in this second embodiment, each processing of S601 to S605 is the same as each processing of S601 to S605 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the through gate passage process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the first entrance flag 203v is ON. It is determined whether there is any (S611). That is, it is determined whether or not the avoidance period is set after the jackpot is over, and if the first-time entry flag 203v is on (the avoidance period), the first-time entry command is set (S612), The flag 203v is set to off (S613), and the process proceeds to S602. On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when it is determined that the first-time entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), the processing of S612 and S613 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S602.

  The initial entry command set by the processing of S612 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first ball entry command, it sets the execution of the firing direction notification effect on condition that the special symbol is in the time saving state. After the jackpot is over, the game state set after the jackpot is the latent probability state or the probability variation state by having a configuration in which execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. It can be difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that the advantageous latent state is set for a long time.

  Next, the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG. This big hit ending process 2 (S1021) is a process that is executed instead of the big hit ending process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and like the big hit ending process (see FIG. 35), passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. This is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit according to the situation.

  Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in this second embodiment, each processing of S1201 and S1205 is the same as each processing of S1201 and S1205 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then, (S1211), the process proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the process of S1211 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1212.

  In the process of S1212, the time saving number corresponding to the game state specified by the data stored in the winning state storage area 203t is read from the time saving type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time saving medium counter 203r. Yes (S1212). Next, the state command is set based on the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r updated in the processes of S1211 and S1212.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f in accordance with the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1205 ends, the first-time entrance flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and the process ends. Thereby, the avoidance period can be set after the jackpot is over.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1621) executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination processing 2 (S1621) is processing for determining the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the command determination processing 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in S1701 to S1709 and S1711 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S-1713 is performed.

  Further, in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the status command is received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S1709 (S1709: Yes), the content of the status command is changed. The state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process ends. Details of this status command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. Furthermore, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1711 that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), the first-time entrance command is then issued. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1722), and if the first-time entry command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first-time entry processing for setting an effect according to the current game state is executed (S1723), This process ends. Details of the first-time entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the details of the above-described status command processing (S1721) will be described. When this state command processing is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), it is then determined whether the time saving state flag 223f is on (S3903). When it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state notified by the current state command is the latent probability state (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, when it is determined that the notified game state is the latent probability state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probability changed state is returned to the latent probability state, and thus the latent probability return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (b)), the player is informed that the latent state has been restored (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. Thereby, the player can be easily made aware of the transition from the advantageous probability changing state to the more advantageous latent probability state, which can please the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the probability variation state flag 223e is off (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No), When it is determined that the game state other than the latent state is notified in the process of S3904 (S3904: No), it is not the case where the probability changed state is returned to the latent state, so the process of S3905 is skipped and the process is executed. The process moves to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, the values of the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the state command notified from the main control device 110, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-mentioned first-time entrance process (S1723) will be described. When the first ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S4001). Next, it is determined whether the read value of the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), it is not the timing to execute the firing direction notification effect, so this processing is ended as it is. And returns to the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 70).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), it is then determined whether the time saving state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the current game state is the probability change state and the avoidance period has ended. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right-handed stroke (see FIG. 59 (a)), the display right-handed effect command is set (S4004), and the present process is terminated. The display right-handing effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display right-handing effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 59 (a)) of a mode in which the right-handing is notified on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is the latent state and the avoidance period has ended. Of the notification effects, a left display effect command for display is set (S4005) in order to execute an effect in which left hit is informed (see FIG. 58 (b)), and the present process is ended. The display left-handing effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display left-handing effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 58 (b)) of the mode of notifying the left-handing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, by executing the first-time ball entry process (S1723), it is possible to notify an appropriate firing direction at which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of game states including two types of game states (probably changed state and latent probability state) that are advantageous to the player. Then, in the most advantageous latent probability state, it is configured such that it can be shifted to another gaming state only by the big hit, and the transition destination is basically the probability variation state. By configuring in this way, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol will be set after the big hit at least twice in a row, including the latent state, so a short period You can make multiple jackpots in succession. Therefore, since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is a big hit, the latent probability state is set again, or when the probability variation state is a big hit, the probability variation state is set again. It is configured to be provided in some cases. In other words, the number of consecutive big hits in the latent probability state is variable depending on the luck of the player. With such a configuration, it is difficult to predict how many high-probability states and jackpots of the special symbol will be repeated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the latent state is shifted to the probable variation state with a low degree of advantage, the latent probability is increased when a part of the big hit (big hit I) and a short time period elapse. It is configured to be able to return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it becomes an advantageous state that the high-probability state of the special symbol is set again after the big hit at least twice in succession, so that the player can be pleased. Further, in the second embodiment, when it moves to the latent probability state and the probability variation state after the big hit, in order to make it difficult to understand which game state, the game state (ball firing direction) is changed. It is configured to delay the execution of the notification (launch direction notification effect) from the end of the jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is over, until the first passing through the through gate 67, the execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided, and when it is detected that the ball first passes through the through gate 67, the game is played. It is configured to execute the firing direction notification effect according to the state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more unclear whether it is the latent state or the probable variation state for a long time, so it is expected that the transition to the latent state is expected for a longer time. Can be done.

  In addition, when the opening A is set (that is, a disadvantageous) jackpot type (jackpot J, K) in the probability variation state, a time saving period is provided after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state of the special symbol (latent probability state, probability variation state) is finished, it is configured not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state, it is basically configured not to fall to the normal state. That is, when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state, the time saving state is basically looped or shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the time saving state is looped, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the game moves to the latent probability state, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

  In the second embodiment, the probability of being a small hit is high due to the special symbol lottery in the latent state, and the small hit is frequently made. As a result, the ball retention in the latent state is improved and the player's motivation for the game in the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, the jackpot type having a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the latent state, the 15th round jackpot is easy to be determined, while the second special symbol that is easily executed in the probability variation state In the lottery, the 8 round jackpot may be easily determined. By configuring in this way, in the latent state, the number of balls to be held tends to decrease by left-handed hitting, but the probability of being a jackpot is high, and if it is a jackpot, it will be possible to obtain more prize balls, It can be advantageous for the player even if it is taken into consideration. Furthermore, by making it easy to select 15 rounds in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is possible to allow the player to select a game method that dares to left-handed in the probability changing state. That is, in the probability change state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long, the player has a highly stable gameplay in which the player hits the ball by right-handing and does not reduce the number of balls held. By hitting the left, the ball will be poor, but if you hit it, you can easily get to 15 rounds. It has a high gambling property. (If you win with a small number of draws, the profit is large, but if you continue to lose it, you may lose. ) It is possible to allow the player to select the playability. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that matches the taste of each player.

  In the second embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit is configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of probability changes may be limited to 100. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game with a feeling of tension even in an advantageous latent probability state or a probable variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game becomes monotonous. In addition, in the second embodiment, as the time saving period of the normal symbol, any of 20, 50, and 100 times is set, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving period may be arbitrarily set. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the short-time period continues until the next big hit. Specifically, for example, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol may both continue until the next big hit.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the first control command is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 upon detection of the first control result for the through gate 67. . Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that receives the first-time entry command is configured to execute the launch direction notification effect according to the gaming state when the gaming state is the latent probability state or the probability variation state, but this is not the only option. I can't. For example, when it is time to determine the game state on the main controller 110 side and execute the firing direction notification effect (passage of the through gate 67 is first detected after the big hit, and the game state is a latent state or a certain change). It may be configured such that the initial entry command is output only in the case of (state). As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, the output frequency of the first-time entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the voice lamp control device 113 side determines whether or not it is the first pass. The current game state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the firing direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to determine whether it is the first time. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first-time entry flag 203v, and the processing of the main controller 110 can be reduced. The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability state or the probability variation state is set after the big hit, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67, but the firing direction notification effect is performed. The execution condition of is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect when a normal symbol hits, or to execute the firing direction notification effect when the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). May be Also, by combining these, the firing direction notification effect is executed when either the normal symbol hits or the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be configured. Further, for example, after the jackpot, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) may elapse, and then a launch direction notification effect may be executed according to the gaming state. Furthermore, for example, instead of not providing the avoidance period, as a mode of the launch direction notification effect, after the jackpot, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the direction to be launched. Good. Here, examples of the mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize include a mode in which the characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed in fine characters and the characters are enlarged with the passage of time. Even in the case of these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the latent state or the probable state is changed, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's expectation for the latent state can be maintained longer. .

  In the second embodiment, as the effect during the avoidance period during which the execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided (delayed), the effect of notifying the aiming at the through gate 67 is executed, but the avoidance is performed. The presentation mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, the player may be informed to aim at the through gate 67 by left-handing regardless of the game state. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from becoming difficult to be performed by performing a right-hand strike during the avoidance period (suppression). can do. Further, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the game state, even if the player left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying left-handedness during the avoidance period, it is possible to allow the player to efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent probability state or the probable variation state.

  In the second embodiment, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are provided as advantageous game states, and the latent probability state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be configured to be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probability changing state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, the time saving period is given at a rate of 75% (that is, the probability changing state easily loops). To be configured). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot J, K, L (sort 75%) in the probable variation state, the opening B is set and a short time period is given, and the jackpot I (sort 25%). In this case, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given (transition to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent probability state, the opening A may be set for a majority of jackpot types (for example, 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpots F and G (sorting 65%), the opening A is set and a short-time period is given (that is, falling into a short-lived state), and the jackpot E (sorting 25). %), The opening B is set and the short-time period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped). In the jackpot H (sorting 10%), the opening B is set and the short-time period is set. It may be configured to be given (that is, returned to the probability change state). By configuring in this way, contrary to the second embodiment, the probability variation state can be the most advantageous game state. Further, in this case, in the avoidance period after the transition to the latent probability state or the probable variation state, the effect of informing left-handing may be executed. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from becoming difficult to be performed by performing a right-hand strike during the avoidance period (suppression). can do. Further, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the game state, even if the player left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying left-handedness during the avoidance period, it is possible to allow the player to efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent probability state or the probable variation state. Furthermore, if the player is notified of a right-handed hit upon entry to the through-gate 67, it means that the player has transitioned (or looped) to the most favorable probability change state, so the left-handed hit is once notified. Then, it is possible to increase the joy of the player's transitioning (or looping) to the probability changing state by making it think that the state has transited (or looped) to the latent state.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, based on that the ball first passes through the through gate 67, which of the latent state and the probable state is changed to the gaming state by the firing direction notification effect? Although it is configured to notify the player, the notification timing of the game state is not limited to this. For example, when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted and notified from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t. This allows the player to be informed of the gaming state at an early stage. Further, for example, a predetermined round of jackpots (e.g., the eighth round), or during the execution of the ending effect of the jackpot, it may be configured to notify the gaming state after the jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, the firing direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through direction 67 may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect based on the first passage after the jackpot finish on the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13. Then, during the avoidance period, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting aiming at the through gate 67 on the left side. With this configuration, when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible for the player to perform left-handed striking to easily enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. In addition, even if the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probable change state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left-side through gate 67 is a win, after confirming the launch notification effect, the right Even if the player hits, the variation time of the length that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 sufficiently before the electric accessory 640a is opened is set, so that the player is lost. You can play without playing. In this case, during the jackpot ending period, the ending effect may be configured to suggest returning to the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from hitting the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and it is possible to perform a left hit before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to lose more easily. Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the jackpot winning prize opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning prize winning opening 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Good. With such a configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit left in order to put the ball into the small hit winning hole 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 (prize). You can Therefore, since it is possible to perform a left-handed stroke before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the player is less likely to lose. It should be noted that instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated entrance (trial entrance) for triggering execution of the firing direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the left through gate 67.

  In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving state may be more advantageous than the latent probability state. More specifically, for example, it is configured so that the difference between the jackpot probability in the high-probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is small (for example, 1/50 when the probability is low, and the probability is high). Time is 1/49). Then, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type in which the number of award balls that can be obtained is small is increased (for example, the number of rounds is “jackpot α”, “jackpot”) Beta can be determined), if the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the percentage of the big hit type that can get a large number of prize balls is determined to be high (for example, the number of rounds is Configure 15 rounds of “big hit γ” and “big hit δ”). Then, in the normal state where a game is played by left-handed play, when the "big hit α" is reached, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the jackpot type that can obtain a large number of prize balls is easily determined (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), and the time saving state is easily configured. On the other hand, when the “big hit β” occurs in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, the jackpot type with few prize balls is easily determined (the first special symbol lottery is easily executed), and the configuration is facilitated to shift to a latent state. Further, in the time saving state in which a game is played by hitting to the right, an opening A is set when the "big hit γ" is reached, and a time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time saving state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played by hitting to the right is easily set. As a result, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the time saving state or the probability variation state in which the right-handed game is played is basically set, which is most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the probability variation state, the opening B is set, and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played by hitting the right side is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the probability changing state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous latent state in which a game is left-handed is easily set. Thereby, the probability change state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, but there is a possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous latent probability state after a big hit, so the advantage degree should be low compared to the time saving state. You can Further, in the latent state in which the player is left-handed to play the game, when the “big hit α” is reached, the opening A is set, and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured to be able to shift to the most advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, in the case of the “big hit β” in the latent state, the opening A is set and the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured such that a disadvantageous normal state in which a game is left-handed is easily set. In this way, by changing the combination of the jackpot type and the game state, the correspondence relationship with the opening type, and the correspondence relationship between the short-term and short-term, the time-shortened state can be most advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the player can be pleased by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the probability variation state or the latent probability state which is generally advantageous. . In addition, in a normal state or a latent state that is unfavorable to the player, since it is configured such that a short time period is not given when the jackpot for which the opening B is set is made, one round of the jackpot for which the opening B is set. It is possible to fundamentally make an irregular game method aiming at shifting to a time saving state by intentionally not hitting the ball with the eyes. More specifically, assuming that the jackpot with the opening B is set to give a shorter time period, by intentionally striking so as not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, only the short time period is set after the big jackpot, and it is easy to do. The most advantageous time saving state will be set. In other words, if an irregular game method is performed when a jackpot is hit in an unfavorable state, there is a problem that the game is surely set to the time saving state. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, by adopting a configuration that does not give a time saving period, the normal state is only set even if the irregular game method is performed in the first round, so the irregular The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

  Further, in the case where the time saving state is the most advantageous game state, the configuration may not be provided with the probability changing state. That is, the game state transition method in the normal state or the latent probability state may be left as it is, and when the big hit occurs in the time shortened state, the time shortened state may be basically looped or the latent state may be transferred. More specifically, when the “big hit γ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time saving state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening B is set and the time saving period is not provided. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to a disadvantageous latent state. With this configuration, when the "big hit δ" occurs in the time saving state, even if the player intentionally does not hit the ball in the first round, the player does not shift to an advantageous state (time saving period. Since the normal state is not given), it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the ball is not intentionally shot in the first round. That is, it is possible to suppress an irregular playing method in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent probability state, and the time saving state. In addition, since the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the time shortening state rather than shifting to the latent state which is generally advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel game playability.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent probability state or the probable variation state is set after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, a configuration may be provided in which the firing direction notification effect is executed immediately after the jackpot is over, and the case where the firing direction notification effect is executed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set when the latent probability state is set may be higher than that when the probability variation state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a more advantageous latent probability state when the avoidance period is set.

<Regarding Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described. In the above-described second embodiment, four game states, that is, a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state, are used to be exchanged.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the three game states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are exchanged. Then, in the probability variation state, a loop occurs when a big hit occurs, or a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. Further, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the advantageous time saving state is looped as compared with the normal state, or is returned to the most advantageous probability changing state in this modification. With such a configuration, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, even if the jackpot is hit, the state is basically the least disadvantageous, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a game state transition method in the modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, if the jackpot F in the lottery for the first special symbol (and the jackpot J in the lottery for the second special symbol), the probability change state instead of the latent probability state. The game state transition method is the same as that in the second embodiment, except that the game state is transitioned to. That is, when the jackpot F in the normal state (and when it becomes the jackpot J), the time-saving type selection table 202g basically gives a high-probability state of a normal symbol that continues to the next jackpot. has been edited. It is to be noted that the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set, and if the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 despite the setting of the opening B, the hour / hour type selection table is provided such that 100 hour / hour periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  In addition, even in the time saving state, if the jackpot J in the second special symbol lottery (and the jackpot F in the first special symbol lottery), shift to the probability variation state instead of the latent probability state. Except for, the game state transition method is the same as in the second embodiment. That is, when the jackpot J (and when the jackpot F is achieved) in the time saving state, the time saving type selection table 202g is basically provided such that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol that continues to the next jackpot is given. has been edited. It should be noted that the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set, and when the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 despite the opening B being set, the hour / hour type selection table is provided such that 100 hour / hour periods are provided. 202g has been changed.

  Also, in the probability variation state, the most advantageous probability variation state when the jackpot J, K, L is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and the jackpot F, G, H is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol). It has been modified to loop. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set when the big hits J, K, and L occur in the probability changing state (and when the big hits F, G, and H occur). . In addition, it becomes one of big hit J, K, L (and big hit F, G, H), when passing probability change switch 65e3, the high probability state of the normal design which continues to the next big hit is set, big hit J , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H) and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3, the hour / hour type selection table 202g is changed so that the hour / hour is set 100 times. Has been done.

  In addition, in the probability variation state, when the jackpot I in the lottery of the second special symbol is obtained (and when the jackpot E is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), it is configured to shift to the time saving state. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set when the jackpot I is obtained (and when the jackpot E is obtained) in the probability variation state. Moreover, it becomes a big hit I (or big hit E), and when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues to the next big hit is set, and it becomes a big hit I (or big hit E), and the probability variation switch 65e3. When the ball does not pass, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 50 times is set.

  In this way, by adopting the game state transition method shown in FIG. 73, among the three types of states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, the probability variation state can be the most advantageous state. Then, when a big hit occurs in the probability variation state, it can be basically configured to loop the probability variation state or shift to the time saving state. As a result, when the probability jackpot is a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I), it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game is reduced at the time when the probability variation state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately (so-called improper play). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is looped or returned to the probability variation state. With this configuration, when a disadvantageous jackpot (jackpot I, K, L) occurs in a time-saving state, it is possible to prevent falling to the most disadvantageous normal state. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered, and the player to immediately quit the game (so-called improper play). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As described above, the modified example of the second embodiment is configured to shift to the time saving state when the jackpot type is disadvantageous in the probability changing state or the time saving state. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, a game is played. There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given. As the privilege game, only the privilege game is given (no additional value is added after the privilege game), and as the added value after the privilege game, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. There is one that is provided with a second bonus game that is set to a different advantageous game state. Also, in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the ball entrance provided with the specific area inside, so once the advantageous game state can be entered, the privilege game and the advantageous game state are repeated. Since it is easy for the player to play the game, a very advantageous state is formed for the player.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous game state, the player will fall to the most unfavorable normal game state. Therefore, when the normal game state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the advantageous definite state is completed, it is prevented from falling to the most unfavorable normal state, and a relatively short time saving state is set compared to the normal state. Since the configuration is facilitated, even when the advantageous probability variation state ends, it is possible to make the player think that he / she will continue the game until the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is lowered, and thus it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in the said 2nd Embodiment and the modification of 2nd Embodiment, although it was the structure which changes an advantageous jackpot classification according to a game state, you may fix an advantageous jackpot classification and an unfavorable jackpot classification. . More specifically, for example, the jackpot F and the jackpot J may be the advantageous jackpot types, and the other jackpot types may be the disadvantageous jackpot types. Then, in the normal state and the time saving state, it is configured to shift to the latent probability state (probably changed state in the case of the modified example) by becoming the big hits F and J, and as the configuration in which the same state is looped by becoming another big hit type. Good. Further, in the latent probability state, the latent probability state may be looped by the jackpots F and J, and the probability change state may be shifted by another jackpot type. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be looped by the jackpots F and J, and may be shifted to the time saving state by another jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type can be easily understood.

  In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a game state (latent probability state or probability variation state) advantageous when a big hit occurs in a time saving state, or a time saving state is looped However, the gaming state set when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state is not limited to this. For example, the opening B may be always set when a big hit occurs in the time saving state. That is, the jackpot may be won before the short time period elapses, so that the gaming state can be surely returned to the advantageous gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to more strongly expect a big hit before the time-saving period elapses, so that the player's interest in the game in the time-saving state can be further improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the normal winning passage 65e1 and the special discharging passage 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability variation switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharging passage 65e2 is passed during the big hit. In the case where the special symbol high probability state (probability change state) is given, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the big hit may be determined according to the big hit type and the game state at the time when the big hit is won. That is, in place of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set by referring to this data table at the end of the jackpot. It may be configured. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the first and second embodiments can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning a prize device 65 can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the same operation is set for the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type and the gaming state, but the opening period is changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. Instead of or in addition to this, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as long as the probability variation switch 65e3 continues to pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuous without limitation, but the number of consecutive times may be limited. Specifically, for example, the number of times the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is counted, and when the number of consecutive times becomes a specific number (for example, 5 times), the probability changes with the next jackpot. The passage of the switch 65e3 may be invalidated (203h does not turn on even after passing the probability variation switch 65e3, or the probability variation counter 203g or the probability variation flag 203u is not updated even if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on). . In addition, the passage solenoid 65k does not change even if it is a big hit (that is, the special discharge passage 65e2 is not opened during the big hit) is configured as a special game state, and the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol is a certain number of times. When it becomes (for example, 5 times), the flow path solenoid 65k may be in a game state in which it does not operate. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the high-probability state of the special symbol is excessively continuous, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be changed according to the game state even with the same winning type)
Discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the judgment by the judging means and the privilege game execution thereof. As a type of privilege game executed by the means, a type determining means for determining one type of privilege game from among a plurality of types determined in advance, and a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine provided with And a first variable means and its first variable means which can be changed to an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. 1 variable means, based on that the determination result is the specific determination result, the first variable pattern, the first variable means after the privilege game is started for the first variable pattern, Variable to the open position The first variable control means for varying any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern having a different period until being played, and the game ball entering the ball entering means are inside the ball entering means. Second variable means and a second position changeable to a first position where it is possible to enter a specific area and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. Second variable control means for changing the two variable means in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the specific determination result by the determination means, and to the specific area during execution of the privilege game. When a game ball enters, a game state setting means for setting the game state after executing the privilege game to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, and a game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained, To the type determining means And a determination means for determining one variable pattern which is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on the privilege game type determined by the first variable pattern, The game ball that entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position, and the second variable pattern is the first variable. A gaming machine A1 which is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern when the game ball entered the ball entering means during the period when the means is changed to the open position. .

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Some of the conventional gaming machines have a time saving state that makes it easier to win a start than usual as a bonus after winning. In this conventional type of gaming machine, after the big hit, by changing whether or not the time saving state is given and the time saving period when the time saving state is given according to the game state at the time of winning There are some which diversify the state of the game and improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the lottery probability of winning is fixed according to the type of winning, even if the variety is provided in a short period of time, so the interest of the player should be sufficiently improved. Was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is provided at the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. Is variable. Based on the specific determination result by the determination means, the first variable pattern and the period from the start of the privilege game for the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position. The first variable means is changed by the variable control means in any one of the plurality of variable patterns including at least the second variable pattern in which is different. The first position where the game ball entering the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable control means, and the second variable means has a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the specific determination result by the determining means. It is variable. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after executing the privilege game is set to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. Based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means, one variable pattern that is changed by the first variable control means from a plurality of variable patterns is determined by the determining means. Determined by The first variable pattern is configured such that the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position, and the second variable pattern is the first variable pattern. It is configured such that the game ball entering the ball entering means during the period in which the 1 variable means is changed to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern.

  As a result, the rate at which the first variable pattern in which it is easy to enter the specific area is set based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means is changed. Since it is possible to make it, it is possible to change the ratio in which the advantageous game state is set according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous game state is a first advantageous game state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second variable pattern in which the first variable pattern is less likely to be determined than the first advantageous game state. A gaming machine A2 characterized by including at least an advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, in the advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and the first advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous game state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when the game ball enters the specific area, it is expected that the first advantageous game state is determined and the game is executed. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous game state is one in which the first variable pattern is determined by the determining unit regardless of the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining unit. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means, When in the first advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is likely to be set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player when the first advantageous game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the game state setting means sets the game state after executing the privilege game to the advantageous game when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than a state, and the game state setting means is configured to perform a game to the specific area during execution of the privilege game based on the result of the specific determination in the disadvantageous game state. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, when a ball enters, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is higher than the ratio of setting the second advantageous game state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after executing the privilege game is set to a disadvantaged game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. To be done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in a disadvantageous game state, a ratio at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is The second advantageous gaming state is configured to be higher than the set rate.

  As a result, when the bonus game is executed in the disadvantaged game state, the first advantageous game state can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the disadvantaged game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game state setting means is executing the privilege game based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous game state rather than in the second advantageous game state during execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, when a game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is high.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the privilege game is being executed based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When the game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of the first advantageous game state set by the game state setting means is configured to be high, so once the first advantageous game state is reached, a plurality of privilege games are provided. It becomes easy to set the first advantageous game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is continuously completed over. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the first advantageous game state can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the game state setting means, when the second advantageous game state is set, when the specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied, the first advantageous game A gaming machine A6 characterized by setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state is established when a specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is established. Since the first advantageous game state is set by the setting means, in the second advantageous game state, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The first variable position at which the game ball can enter the ball determining means and the first variable position at which the game ball can be discriminated by the discriminating means when the ball enters the game machine A6. As a variable mode of the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where the game ball is harder to enter than the position and the variable mode of the third variable means, the first variable mode which is easily changed to the first variable position, and its A control means capable of controlling at least a second variable mode that is harder to be changed to the first variable position than a first variable mode, and the first advantageous game state is that the third variable means is controlled by the control means. A gaming machine A7, which is controlled in a second variable mode, wherein the second advantageous game state is one in which the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first variable mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position at which the game ball can enter the entry determination means and a second variable position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. . As a variable mode of the third variable means, at least the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable mode are controlled by the control means. It In the first advantageous game state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, and in the second advantageous game state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode.

  As a result, in the second advantageous game state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the first advantageous game state, the determination by the determination means becomes easy to be executed, so that there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous game state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latent accuracy due to lack of support)
Discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the judgment by the judging means and the privilege game execution thereof. As a gaming state after the privilege game executed by the means is finished, the probability that the specific discrimination result by the discrimination means is set to the first probability is higher than the first probability and the first probability. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state set to the second probability and a third game state which is more advantageous than the second game state and to which the second probability is set, and its When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a game state in which the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state without being triggered by the end of the privilege game state Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a further means.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine to which, as a bonus after winning, a probability variation state in which the winning probability of winning is increased. Furthermore, in such a conventional game machine, a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of times of random change in the probability variation state, and if it is not hit by the lottery of the predetermined upper limit number of times, it is won. There is a method of returning the lottery probability to the normal probability and shifting to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. If you win in this special state, the game value given to the player will be greater than if you win in the probability variation state, so even if the probability variation state ends before it hits, you will be motivated for the game. It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, in a special state set after the probability variation state ends, the winning probability of winning is a normal probability, so it may be missed over a relatively large number of times. Will be more likely. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the privilege game execution unit executes the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination made by the determination unit. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is finished, the probability that a specific judgment result by the judging means is set to the first probability is higher than the first probability and the first probability. At least the second game state set to the second probability and the third game state which is more advantageous than the second game state and to which the second probability is set can be set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means from the second game state to the third game state without the termination of the privilege game state as a trigger.

  As a result, the second game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means even if the bonus game is not achieved, so that the player's interest in the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the third game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means, the second game is performed at least a predetermined number of times including the privilege game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a probability-setting game state is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the bonus game. Since the continuous state in which the second probability is easily set in the bonus game is easily set by the continuous state setting means, the game can be performed with the expectation that the continuous state is set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game state setting means ends the privilege game when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than in the third game state. A gaming machine B3 characterized by a high ratio of setting the gaming state after playing to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the privilege game is executed when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than the privilege game is executed in the third game state. Since the rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end is configured to be high, in the second game state, by the game state changing means before the privilege game is executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is expected that the third game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game state setting means is either the second game state or the third game state when the privilege game executed in the third game state is finished. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being capable of setting.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is finished, the gaming state setting means causes the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Since one of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the bonus game is finished. Therefore, since the game state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that it is possible to please the player by entering the third game state.

  The game ball is entered in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, and the first position at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, which is determined by the determining means, and the first position The variable means and the variable means that can be changed to the second position where the game ball can easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the one position, and the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising variable control means for changing to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second game state is easier to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third game state. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effect is produced. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is easy to enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position. . The variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The second game state is easier to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third game state.

  As a result, the determination by the determination means can be easily performed in the second game state, and thus there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second game state.

  Based on that the second game state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a counting means for counting the number of times a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determining means is consecutive. The game state changing means changes the game state from the second game state to the third game state based on the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaching a specific number. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, based on the setting of the second game state, the counting means counts the number of times the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result by the determination by the determining means is continuous. The game state is changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means on the basis that the number of times of continuation of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaches a specific number.

  As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the deviation determination result will be continuous, rather than having a specific determination result, and thus to provide a gaming machine with novel gaming characteristics. There is an effect that can be.

  As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a type determining means and a game ball for determining one type of privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance are entered. Sphere which can be changed into a ball entrance means and an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entrance means, and a closed position where it is difficult to enter the ball entrance means than the open position. 1 variable means and the game ball that has entered the ball entering means, the first variable position at which the game ball can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and the first variable position is compared. The second variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area and the determination result is the specific determination result, and the first variable means and the A variable control for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern that is changed by the means and its variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means enters the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position. The game state setting means is provided with a determining means capable of determining at least a possible first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. If a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is finished is set to either the second game state or the third game state. The determining means determines one variable pattern based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B7, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B6. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one of a plurality of types determined in advance is determined by the type determining means. The first variable means changes between an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. The first variable position at which the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and the entry into the specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means, the first variable means and the second variable means are changed by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means, the first variable pattern which allows the game ball entering the ball entering means to enter the specific area during the period when the first changing means is changed to the open position. The second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern is configured to be at least determinable by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the game state after the bonus game is finished is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. . The variable pattern of 1 is determined by the determining unit based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining unit.

  Thereby, the easiness of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to change the rate at which the second probability is set after the bonus game is finished, depending on the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are at least different in the period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are the same in the operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that the second variable means is controlled in one way. It suffices to define only variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic C group> (Production that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launch means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launch means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball entering means which is arranged on one path and can enter a game ball, and a second ball entering means which is arranged on the second path and which can enter a game ball, and the first ball entering means, or the first ball entering means 2 Discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of a game ball entering the ball-entering means and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a particular discriminating result by the discrimination by the discriminating means. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon completion of the privilege game executed by the game execution unit and the privilege game execution unit, the determination unit is likely to perform the determination. The first gaming state becomes and before the first route A game state setting unit capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination unit is easily executed when a game ball is launched on the second path, and the game state thereof. After the game state of 1 is set by the setting means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means and the condition determining means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching device. On the basis of the above, the game machine C1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination by the determining means as a path for launching the game ball.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. In some of the conventional game machines, at least a part of the winning is provided with a time saving state in which a start winning is likely to occur. Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided on the gaming board, and when the game time is shortened, some of the starting winning openings are likely to win a game ball. In this gaming machine, depending on whether it is in a time-saving state, by providing a configuration (instruction production) that suggests which starting winning opening should be played, a more easy-to-understand game is provided. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-230825).

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, when the player shifts to the short-time state after hitting, the suggestive effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation of whether or not the time-shortened state is maintained is maintained only at the end of the jackpot at the longest. There was a problem that I could not do it.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and the first route thereof. And a second path different from. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The condition determining means determines whether or not the game ball launched by the launching means satisfies a predetermined condition after the game state setting means sets one game state, and the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the effect execution means executes the specific effect of a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination by the determination means as the path for launching the game ball.

  As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that an expectation that a more advantageous game state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect is that you can do it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the variable position is variable between a first position at which the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball does not easily enter the second position as compared to the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and its varying means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, the second gaming state is the specific state rather than the first gaming state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that a condition is easily established.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the second ball as compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second game state is configured so that the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state.

  As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to operate the launching means so as to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance while the changing means is being changed to the first position. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, there is provided a passage means through which the game ball can pass, and a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the determination is that the gaming ball shot by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a certain number of times. A gaming machine C3, which is established when the game is played.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed the passage means. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means has passed the passing means a specific number of times.

  This allows the player to shoot a ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, as the passing means, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided. Gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided as the passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by launching the game ball to the route that the player likes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the first game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and the predetermined condition is that the game state is set by the game state setting means, and then is shot by the launching means. A gaming machine C5, which is established when the played game ball first passes through the first passing means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball shot by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the playing state setting means.

  As a result, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the first route in the expectation that the first route that is easily discriminated by the discriminating means in the advantageous first game state is suggested by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In at least the second gaming state in any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, during the period from the satisfaction of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position, the second means is used by the launching means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the gaming ball launched to the path is longer than the period required to reach the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the variable means is changed to the first position is When the set game state is the second game state, the game ball shot by the launching means to the second path is configured to be longer than the period required to reach the second ball entering means. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied on the basis of having passed the passing means and the second route is suggested by the specific effect, the second ball entering means before the changing means is changed to the first position. A game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the chance of the discrimination by the discriminating means can be maximized in the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine C2, provided in the first path, and provided with a predetermined ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the predetermined condition is that the game state is set by the game state setting means, and then by the launching means. A gaming machine C7, which is established when a game ball shot is first entered into the predetermined ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, a predetermined ball entering means different from the first ball entering means is provided in the first path. Then, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching unit after the game state is set by the game state setting unit first enters the predetermined entry unit.

  As a result, the ball can be shot aiming at the predetermined ball entrance means in an attempt to satisfy the predetermined condition, and thus there is an effect that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

  A launch means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launch means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball entering means which is arranged on one path and can enter a game ball, and a second ball entering means which is arranged on the second path and which can enter a game ball, and the first ball entering means, or the first ball entering means. 2 Discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of a game ball entering the ball-entering means and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a particular discriminating result by the discrimination by the discriminating means. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon completion of the privilege game executed by the game execution unit and the privilege game execution unit, the determination unit is likely to perform the determination. The first gaming state becomes and before the first route A game state setting unit capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination unit is easily executed when a game ball is launched on the second path, and the game state thereof. The determination means executes the determination by the determination means as a route for launching a game ball based on the time elapsed from the setting of the game state of 1 by the setting means and the time elapsed after the specific elapsed time is reached by the time counting means. A gaming machine C8, characterized in that the gaming machine C8 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that is easily performed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the first route through which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched by the launching device can pass through, and the first route. And a different second path. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The elapsed time after the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means is clocked by the time counting means, and the determination means is used as a route for launching a game ball based on the fact that the specific elapsed time has been reached by the time counting means. The specific effect of a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination is executed by the effect executing means.

  As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation for setting a more advantageous game state is maintained at least until the specific elapsed time is reached. The effect is that you can.

  As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a type determining means and a game ball for determining one type of privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance are entered. It is possible to change the ball into a variable ball entrance means and an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance means, and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entrance means than the open position. The first variable position and the first variable position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering device can enter the specific area provided inside the variable ball entering device, and the first variable position thereof. On the basis of the result of the specific determination by the second variable means and the determination means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area compared to the position, the first variable The variable means and the second variable means are arranged in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means to be changed and the variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position is specified. The game includes a first variable pattern capable of entering a region, and a determining means capable of determining at least a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern. The state setting means, when a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, sets the game state after the privilege game ends to one of the first game state and the second game state. When a game ball does not enter the specific area, the third game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set, and the determining means determines the specific determination. Result And playing state time point, based on the type of the benefits game determined by the type determination means, the gaming machine is characterized in that for determining the first variable pattern C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type of privilege game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types determined in advance. The first variable means is changed between an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open position. A game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable ball entering means, and a first variable position that allows the game ball to enter a specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means, the first variable means and the second variable means are changed by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means, the first variable pattern which allows the game ball entering the ball entering means to enter the specific area during the period when the first changing means is changed to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern, is determined by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the game state after the bonus game is finished is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is finished is less favorable to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means. The game state is set. Based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination unit, the variable unit of 1 is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, the easiness of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the first game state or the second game state after the end of the bonus game, depending on the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9, the determining means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C9, the determination means makes the first variable when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state rather than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is configured to be easily determined, it can be expected that the specific route suggests the first route that facilitates the determination in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are at least different from each other in the period from the start of the privilege game to the change of the first variable means to the open position. A gaming machine C11 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the privilege game is started. Since the period up to is configured to be different at least, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable unit is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are the same in the operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that there is one way of controlling the second variable means. It suffices to define only variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic D group> (A non-V time saving is given during probability change or pullback time saving)
Determination means for performing determination based on satisfaction of the determination condition and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means and satisfaction of the specific condition Based on the above, a game state setting in which one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which determination by the determination means is easier to be performed than the first game state In the gaming machine provided with means, a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, an open position at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and an entrance to the ball entering means from the open position. A first variable means that can be changed to a closed position where the ball becomes difficult, and a first variable means that changes the first variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on a specific determination result by the determination by the determination means. Variable control means and front A game ball that has entered the ball entering means has a first position at which the game ball can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and a ball enters the specific area from the first position. The second variable control means and the second variable means, which can be changed to the difficult second position, are changed in a predetermined variable pattern that is predetermined based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. As a variable pattern that is changed by the second variable control means and the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and the specific area rather than the first variable pattern When a game ball enters the specific area while the privilege game is being executed, a determining unit that determines one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the game. In the specific area And a privilege granting unit for granting a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than if the player did not enter the game, the game state setting unit does not grant the specific privilege by the privilege granting unit. A gaming machine D1 capable of setting the second game state when

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, a game is played. There is a case where the ratio of giving a specific privilege advantageous to a person is high. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game in which the game state is set to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. Also, in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the ball entrance provided with the specific area inside, so once the advantageous game state can be entered, the privilege game and the advantageous game state are repeated. Since it is easy for the player to play the game, a very advantageous state is formed for the player.

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, if the player fails to draw a lot of specific benefits in the advantageous game state, he / she will fall to the most unfavorable normal game state. However, there is a problem in that the player's motivation for the game is significantly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is provided at the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the open position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. Is changed, and the first variable means is changed by the first variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. The first position where the game ball entering the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means is changed by a predetermined variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. To be done. As a variable pattern that is changed by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter a specific area and a second pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from the plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a privilege game, a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means at a higher rate than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. . When a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the second gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means.

  As a result, the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, is set when the specific privilege is not granted, and the motivation for the game of the player is impaired when the specific privilege is not granted. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the game state setting means sets the first game state when the privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the first game state, A gaming machine D2, which sets the second gaming state when the particular privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first game state is set by the game state setting unit when the privilege is not given by the privilege giving unit in the privilege game executed in the first game state. On the other hand, in the privilege game executed in the second game state, when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the game state setting means sets the second game state.

  As a result, in the second game state that is advantageous to the player, the second game state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set such that the probability that the specific determination result is the specific determination result is set to the first probability, and the game state setting means determines the specific determination. It is possible to set a third game state in which the resulting probability is set to a second probability higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means sets the game state setting means to the third state as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the gaming state is set.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. In other words, the first game state and the second game state are set to the first probability with the probability of being a specific determination result. The third game state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to the second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the game state setting means. The privilege granting means is configured so that the gaming status setting means sets the third gaming status as a specific privilege.

  As a result, when a specific privilege is granted, a specific determination result is likely to be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for the specific privilege.

  In the gaming machine D3, the game state setting means sets the second game state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third game state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, when a particular privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Since the state is set, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous first game state from being set from the third game state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  A ball-entering means that is discriminated by the discriminating means on the basis of a game-ball entering in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position at which the game-ball can enter the ball-entering means. , Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means. The third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position on the basis of a predetermined determination result for performing a predetermined determination and a predetermined determination result by the predetermined determination means. A gaming machine D5 comprising a third variable control means, wherein the second game state has a higher probability of being the predetermined determination result than the first game state.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is produced. That is, the third variable means is changed to the first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second variable position where the ball entering is more difficult than the first variable position. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, a predetermined judgment is made by the predetermined judging means, and based on the result of the judgment made by the predetermined judging means being a predetermined judgment result, the third variable means makes the 23rd variable control. It is changed by the means from the second variable position to the first variable position. The second gaming state is configured to have a higher probability of having a predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

  As a result, the predetermined discrimination is easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the player can efficiently play the game.

<Characteristic E group> (100% accurate change in advantageous state)
It is determined that a specific determination result is obtained by a determination means that performs determination based on a game ball that can enter a game ball and a game ball that has entered the game ball. On the basis of the variable ball entering means, the game machine has a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player and a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the bonus game. A game ball that does not enter the specific ball-in area during execution of the special ball-in area which is arranged inside and in which the game ball that entered the variable ball-in means can enter In this case, the first game state is set, and when a game ball enters the specific entry area during execution of one of the privilege games, a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state is set. A game state setting means and a game for the specific entry area in the privilege game of 1. As a ball entrance rate, there is provided a first ball entrance rate and a second ball entrance rate that is higher than the first ball entrance rate. The rate setting means sets the second entry rate higher when the privilege game is executed in the second game state than when the privilege game is executed in the first game state. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is performed by a lottery executed based on a starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set to an open state where the ball can enter, and the specific In some cases, a privilege is given when a ball enters the winning opening. Further, in some of the conventional game machines, a specific winning area is provided inside the specific winning opening, in which a probability variation state is provided by the ball entering. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area is made different according to the type of hit (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the easiness of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, the state changes to the probability variation state when the hit type is known. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation with respect to the probability fluctuation state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state which is advantageous to the player, the rate of setting the second entry rate is high, so that the second game state is continued. While playing, there is an effect that it can be expected that the game ball will enter the specific entry area continuously.

  In the gaming machine E1, at least a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided as the ball entering means, and the ball entering rate setting means includes the second ball entering means. When the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entering the ball means, and when the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entering means in the second game state, The rate of setting the second ball entry rate becomes high, and the first ball entry rate is set when the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entry into the first ball entry means in the first gaming state. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by having a higher rate of playing.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the ball entering means, the rate of setting the second ball entering rate becomes high. Therefore, in the second game state, the game can be played without worrying about the ball entering means into which the game ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in peace in the second game state.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position where the game ball easily enters the variable ball entering means and a second variable position where the game ball does not easily enter the first variable position compared to the first variable position. The first variable means and the first variable means are provided upstream of the specific variable area and the first variable control means for varying the first variable means in accordance with a predetermined first variable pattern during execution of the privilege game. A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means easily enters the specific ball entry area, and a game ball enters the specific ball entry area in comparison with the first variable state. A second variable control that can be changed to a second variable state that is difficult to perform and a second variable control that changes the second variable means in accordance with a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. Means and the first after the execution of the privilege game is started As a period until the control by the variable control unit is started, a period in which the first variable unit is changed according to the first variable pattern is in the first variable position, and a period in which the first variable position is changed according to the second variable pattern. A first period in which the second variable unit is in the first variable state is less likely to overlap, a period in which the first variable unit is in the first variable position than the first period, and the second variable unit. And a period setting unit capable of setting a second period in which the period in which the first variable state becomes the first variable state is likely to overlap, and the ball entrance rate setting unit uses the period setting unit as the first ball entrance rate. A gaming machine E3, wherein the first period is controlled so that the second entering rate is controlled by the period setting means so that the second period is set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, by changing only the period from the start of the execution of the privilege game until the control by the first variable control means is started Since the rate can be changed, it is not necessary to set a complicated variable pattern, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64 First Ball Entrance (First Ball Means)
67 Through gate (passing means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
640 Second Ball Entrance (Second Ball Means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S217 Part of determination means S218 Special game execution means S305 Part of determination means S512 Predetermined determination means S525 Variable control means S1211, S1212 Game state setting means S1722, S4002 Condition determination means S4004, S4005 Specific effect execution means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among these conventional game machines, there is, for example, one in which at least a part of the hit is provided with a time saving state in which a start winning is likely to occur. Further, according to the conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of start winning opening is provided on the game board, Ri mower which to some of the starting winning opening game ball easily winning by the time reduction state , Was trying to improve the interest of the player.

JP, 2006-230825, A

However, such a conventional game machine, there may not be able to sufficiently improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the launching means capable of launching the game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched by the launching means can pass through. 1 path, a second path different from the first path, and a position where a game ball that has passed the first path can enter and a position where the game ball that has passed the second path is difficult to enter The first ball entering means provided and the game ball that has passed through the second path can be entered, and the game ball that has passed through the first path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter . 2 ball entering means, a determining means for performing a determination based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and a first state in which the game ball can enter And a variable ball entering means that can be changed to a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, Based of the privilege providing means for providing a predetermined privilege gaming ball Based upon the ball entrance to variable ball entrance means, that the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a particular judgment result predetermined , Variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and from the second route based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. the determination is better even that fired the first game condition in which determination is easily performed in said discriminating means who fired the game balls to the first path, the game balls in the second path than the first path a second playing state determination is easily performed means, and including at least configurable gaming state setting means playing state one of the plurality of game states, based on the execution of the variable game is finished, After the execution of the variable game is completed A first demonstration execution means for executing a first effect made from a common representation embodiment not according to the playing state, with particular basis the predetermined specific conditions during the first demonstration execution is met, the game A second effect configured in an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player a route corresponding to the type of the game state set as the game state after the execution of the variable game by the state setting means is executed . 2 production execution means, the specific condition, the game ball is shot to the second path, even if the game ball is shot to the first path during execution of the first effect also it is constructed under the conditions that may be established in the case.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on an operation by a player, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and A second path different from the first path and a position where a game ball that has passed the first path can enter and a game ball that has passed the second path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter 1 ball entry means, and a second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has passed the second path can enter and a game ball that has passed the first path is difficult to enter , A first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a first state in which the game ball can enter based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. To the variable ball entering means and the variable ball entering means that can be changed to the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter Based on the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, and the determination result of the determining means being a predetermined specific determination result, the variable ball inputting means A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, to the first route rather than the second route. The first game state in which the discrimination means is more likely to execute the discrimination of the game ball, and the discrimination means is more likely to be executed in the case where the game ball is ejected to the second path than the first path. The second game state that becomes, the game state setting means capable of setting one game state among a plurality of game states including at least, and the execution of the variable game ends based on the end of the execution of the variable game. Depending on the game state after playing Based on a first effect executing means for executing a first effect configured in a common effect mode and a predetermined specific condition established during execution of the first effect, the game state setting means causes Second effect executing means for executing a second effect configured in an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player a route corresponding to the type of the game state set as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, , And the specific condition is satisfied both when the game ball is launched to the first path and when the game ball is launched to the second path during execution of the first effect. that consists of obtaining conditions.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize device of La-La section, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of variable winning a prize device. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of the flow path solenoid and the operation | movement of an opening-and-closing board in 1 of the big hit. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically correspondence relation between the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, (c) shows typically the correspondence relation between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the avoidance period in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the firing direction alerting production in 2nd Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the launch direction notification production in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the latent probability return production in 2nd Embodiment. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the first ball entry processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method of the game state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a large number of nails, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like are detachably attached from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. To support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Also, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entrance. When 67 is passed, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. When it becomes a special jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As a jackpot type of special symbols, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the jackpot ends, according to the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The two types of "big hit A and B" are big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of “big hit C, D” are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is achieved in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery executed when the player enters is referred to as the second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal design hits, the second ball entrance 640 is changed by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). It will be released. Note that, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, so the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, in the case of winning the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided as special jackpot types.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 round big hit). On the other hand, when the “big hit C” and the “big hit D” are reached, the special game state in which the number of rounds is 15 is achieved (15 round big hit). Further, after each jackpot is finished, as a value added after the jackpot is finished, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased after the jackpot is finished. In addition, if the specific conditions are satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes through a probability variation switch 65e3 described later), after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state (during a probability variation of the special symbol). When the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the high probability state of the special symbol, and the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased, continues after the jackpot ends until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends 50 times. . On the other hand, if the high-probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball did not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased is the variation of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. Will continue until 100 times.

  Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is up, so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probably changed state of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state It is a game state where it is easy to move to (big hit). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" (high probability state of the ordinary symbol) refers to a gaming state in which the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol" (low probability state of ordinary symbol). Indicates that the winning probability is low.

  After that, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot of the special symbol is called a probability variation period of the special symbol. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is called the time saving period of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period of being in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the time to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released at the time of one normal symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is set until the change of the special symbol ends 50 times after the big hit ends, The probability period of special symbols is not limited to 50 times, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. After that, it becomes a big hit, and when the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the "normal pattern normal state" shifts to a "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set “normal time saving state of the symbol” is continued after the jackpot is completed until the variable display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After the special symbol jackpot, if the special symbol lottery for 100 times is not completed and the new special symbol jackpot is not reached, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

  Then, when a new jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, the "ordinary symbol time saving state" is further special after 50 or 100 times from the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display of the symbols ends.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (special symbol according to big hits A to D) (First pattern) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a holding ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

  On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character moves. A notice production is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed on the lower half (second symbol). The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640. FIG. 8 exemplifies the case where four first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, is being performed, and is changed. As the stopped symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through either of the left and right normal ball entrances 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (second symbol) A variable display for alternately illuminating the symbols is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. . Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times, as in the case of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, but 3 times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is arranged on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flowing down from the right direction is You can enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter a ball into the second ball entrance 640, it is basically necessary to allow the flow path provided to the right of the variable display device unit 80 to flow down (so-called right hitting).

  A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass are provided. The game sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by flowing down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2). Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a ball. This special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the big hit, the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) and the ball is the special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can be flowed down is made different depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type.

  More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after the jackpot start regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot (opening period) is made variable according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. As a result, the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and the period during which the special discharge passage 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of the big hit, it is possible to perform the big hit game by paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the big hit game becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning a prize device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the variable winning device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for turning on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, the back cover body 65e, and the channel cover body. A switching member 65h projecting into the flow path formed by 5g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and a back surface arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and actuating the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k are covered from the back surface side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 5B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this structure, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first ball entrance 631 side. Is configured to. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 with the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with a special discharge flow path 65e2 and that is made up of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Also, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 0.2 seconds. There is. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the big hit. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is set in a range of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after the jackpot start and in a range of 3.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds. It operates and becomes a state in which the flow path leading to the probability variation switch 65e3 can pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge passage 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

  The game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be found early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, 15 balls for one ball is won). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot is variable according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state and the period during which it can flow down through the special discharge passage 65e2 is made variable. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the openings A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before the jackpot starts. That is, before the jackpot starts, the sphere is allowed to flow down into the normal discharge passage 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off-state continues for 0.5 seconds even after the jackpot has started (the opening period has come). Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. That is, the sphere can flow down to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

  When the 0.2 second ON state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again. This off-state period continues until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the jackpot was set). Then, after the lapse of the off-state period, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 2 seconds again (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can be passed), and thereafter kept in the off state until the jackpot ends. Be drunk

  Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when the opening A is set and the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, a ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, in one round of jackpot, 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, or the open / close plate 65f1 is set to an open state until 1 second has elapsed from the start of one round. To be done. Since it is difficult to enter 10 balls into the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is basically opened for 1 second in the first round of the big hit. When one round is completed, the open / close plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Then, thereafter, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 30 seconds elapse after the round is started.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 0.2 second ON period of the passage solenoid 65k. However, there is a time lag until the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, the ball solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 0.2 seconds. Is difficult to proceed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the ball cannot reach the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so after the big hit, the low probability state of the special symbol is basically set. Even when the opening A is started, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at the same time as the start of one round, and the ball flows down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h. The sphere can be made to flow down to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 before the entrance of the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the probability changing state.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, when the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 3.5 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. It This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where the opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. Then, after that, similarly to the jackpot in which the opening A is set, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k for 2 seconds. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be made to flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, the special symbol will be given after the big hit. It is possible to shift to the probable state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and the easiness of transition to the probable state is different according to the set opening type. In addition, the type of opening is configured to be selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), a big hit B or a big hit D, an opening A is set, and a big hit A or a big hit C is set. In the case of the opening, the opening B is set. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, whereas when the jackpot A or the jackpot C occurs, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the type of jackpot, it becomes easier or harder to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the special symbol shifts to the specially changed state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. , A fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entry. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball opening 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas includes a first The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the two-ball entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a sphere is common. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special The period is a high probability state of the symbol)) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 12 (a)). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is a random number which is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit shows the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is in the first per random number table for low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12A). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “1 to 10” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See FIG. 12 (a). In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "10/400".

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the jackpot is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit C". When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot D”. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (for example, 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". In the low probability state, when the probability of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is assured, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / outside" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) are set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. . If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In addition, with respect to the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) is set in "198".

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out-of-front and out) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. Further, this second random number table is for a low probability of a normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (a high probability of a normal symbol). It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently (see FIG. 12C). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random value that is a hit for a normal symbol, and the hit is "0". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol “” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds × 1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 3 times". To be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “1 second × 3 times”, but the opening time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. And a work area (work area) for storing values such as The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 31). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table. At least 202e is stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the big hit determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, 10 of "1-10" The judgment value is specified. If the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12 (a)), the special symbol It is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. Values are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, for the first special symbol, in the range of the value 0 to 49 of the first hit type counter C2, "big hit A" is associated and defined. . This jackpot A is a jackpot with eight rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 50, so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is a big hit type regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round).

  Further, "big hit B" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". This "big hit B" is a big hit with the number of rounds of 8 as in the "big hit A". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit B" is 50, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this "big hit B", if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball is the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it is not in the normal state at the time of winning, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, when the big hit B is in the normal state, it is difficult to shift to the probability changing state after the big hit, which is more disadvantageous to the player than when the big hit A is obtained in the normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, with respect to the second special symbol, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", "big hit C" is associated and defined. ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 50, so "big hit C" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected when the jackpot is selected in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the ball can easily pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the jackpot C is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

  Further, "big hit D" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". The “big hit D” is a big hit with 15 rounds, like the “big hit C”. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit D” is 50, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit D” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). In this "big hit D", if the winning state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball changes the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If the winning is in a state other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round). If the "big hit D" is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large as in the "big hit C", and the ball can easily pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Will be advantageous to the person. On the other hand, if the player wins in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in the normal state, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A" or the "big hit C".

  In addition, the opening A is set when the "big hit D" is set in the normal state. In the normal state, an irregular game in which the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640 (struck right) This is to suppress the method. If it becomes "big hit D" in the lottery for the second special symbol, if it is configured so that the opening B is set even in the normal state (that is, if the jackpot is reached in the lottery for the second special symbol, the game is If it is configured such that the probability variation switch 65e3 can be easily passed regardless of the state), the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to transition to the probability variation state is set) of the first special symbol Rather than the lottery, there is a possibility that some players may find it more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the jackpot of the second special symbol in the normal state, the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol In the same way as when it becomes, the opening A, which is hard to shift to the probability changing state, is set at a rate of 50%. With such a configuration, by executing the lottery for the second special symbol even in the normal state, it is possible to invalidate the irregular game method for improving the rush rate in the probability variation state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state. You may comprise. As a result, even in the normal state, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent force against an irregular game method in which the player always hits right to try to execute the lottery for the second special symbol.

  The second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 12 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for winning the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to. , Ordinarily, it is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine a jackpot type and an opening type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot when a jackpot is hit. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, the opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, as the opening type determined when the big hit A, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, and, Normal symbol time saving state), and the probability variation state (probability variation state of the special symbol, and normal symbol time saving state), the opening B is defined in association with each. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the opening B that facilitates the transition from the opening selection table to the probability variation state is read and set, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, as the opening type determined when the jackpot B is decided, the opening A is defined for the normal state, and the opening B is defined for the time saving state and the probability variation state. Therefore, when the big hit B occurs in the time saving state or the probability variation state, the opening B is set so that the transition to the probability variation state is easy, but when the big hit B occurs in the normal state, the transition to the probability variation state occurs. The opening A, which is difficult to do, is set. Therefore, the jackpot B in the normal state is disadvantageous to the player.

  As in the case of the big hit A, the opening type determined when the big hit C becomes the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are defined in association with each other. Further, as in the case of the big hit B, the opening type determined in the case of the big hit D is associated with the opening A for the normal state and the opening B for the time saving state and the probability variation state. Has been done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the opening selection table 202e, the opening type is switched based on the type of the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit. More specifically, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of an ordinary symbol), a big hit B or a big hit D, an opening A is set, and a big hit A or a big hit C is set. In the case of the opening, the opening B is set. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, whereas when the jackpot A or the jackpot C occurs, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, depending on the type of jackpot, it becomes easier or harder to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, it is easy to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in a state other than the normal state, it is almost determined that the special symbol shifts to the specially changed state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203o, a probability variation valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, a big hit flag 203s, and another memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number. The respective values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is an execution area. Is shifted (moved) to, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b, like the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reservation areas. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve And a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b Then, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls of variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S207 of FIG. 25).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S208 of FIG. 25, FIG. 27). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, every time the value of the first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is changed, the variable display held by the main control device 110 is displayed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). The value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 29: No). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. Shows that the probability variation state of the symbol, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the specially changed state of the special symbol, it is a time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it also indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and that the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, 50 is set at the end of the big hit (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Further, each time it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the value is subtracted by 1 (see S220 in FIG. 25). The probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

  This probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the special symbol lottery based on the first random number table 202a for high probability On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is a time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S508, S514, S519 of FIG. 28). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability time. Based on the table 202c, the lottery for the normal symbols is performed, while if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0, the regular symbols based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time are used. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 of FIG. 28).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF when the jackpot is over (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. The configuration may be configured such that 203h is officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before power-off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round for the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1311 in FIG. 36). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303 in FIG. 36). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is determined whether or not it is done, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present embodiment, the passage solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds has passed since the jackpot start, and the passage solenoid 65k is set when 3.5 seconds has passed since the jackpot start. 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the big hit, and 2 seconds have been set when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the big hit. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203n, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( S1407 of FIG. 37). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even after the first round of the big jackpot with the opening A set is finished, the game ball is left illegally in the variable winning device 65, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 2 seconds. It is possible to suppress an irregularity that causes the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being improperly added.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is based on the channel solenoid 65k being ON, and is the probability variation switch. It is shown that the time is less than or equal to the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203p can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge passage 65e2 to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally put into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano is inserted from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a line or the like to allow it to pass therethrough, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1411 of FIG. 37).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. The time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving count shifts to 100 times.

  The big hit flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is ON, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the jackpot is not in jackpot. The big hit flag 203s becomes a big hit by a lottery for special symbols, and is set to ON when the big hit (special game state) is started (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), this jackpot flag 203s is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 25).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is for opening / closing the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 that closes or opens the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation contents instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability variation state flag 223e, a time saving state flag 223f, and a production counter 223g. The power-off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. The winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control device 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the variation effect suspended in the main controller 110 is retained. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is set by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It is designed to be managed on a case-by-case basis.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e is reserved. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and from the holding ball number command, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved sphere number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1708 of FIG. 40). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display hold ball number command is received, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number for the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probability variation state based on the probability variation state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, changing the rear surface type) according to the determined game state is performed.

  The time saving state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state of a normal symbol. The time saving state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state based on the time saving state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, changing the back surface type) according to the determined game state is performed.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter that is referred to when selecting various effects (back surface type, etc.). The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which the determined effect mode is defined for each value of the effect counter 223g. By using the effect counter 223g, various effects can be randomly selected and executed.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), the power-off flag 223y is set to be constant after the power-off flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a lapse timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored as a character ROM 234.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or designates it by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame on the basis of a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that the image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored at the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 18C. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if "the special symbol is out", it is shown in FIG. 18 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any concern that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in the back image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 19B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. . Further, FIG. 20 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 19, all images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. After being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is determined based on the rear surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 determines that the corresponding rear surface is First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 20, with the passage of time, in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing of the above.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range of FIG. 20A to FIG. 20B). ), And image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 20A and 20B) including the initial position thereof is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface E displays the images of FIGS. 20A and 20B using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20A to 20C so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20B to 20C and 20C to 20A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. This allows the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20B to 20C and 20C to 20A to be normally used while the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  It should be noted that, on the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be stored is redundantly stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, although the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 provides the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is going to a special game state and the large opening that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is about to start. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set as time passes. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. It is possible to create, because in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  Note that “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3605 in FIG. 54B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b In step S2303), the pointer update process (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 23), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing one frame of the image based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 45 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 of FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is turned off when the back image changing process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the back surface image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back surface image notified by the command is set to on in the back surface image determination flag 233x (FIG. 50 (a)). ) S3002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

  The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51), and the demo display data table is displayed. When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2705 of FIG. 47A, S2705 of FIG. 48A, S2805 of FIG. 48B). , S2905 in FIG. 49). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51), and the confirmed display data table other than the confirmed display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2505 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b), FIG. 49, S2905). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), the first symbol display. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S203). . Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is set (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (of the first special symbol) The variable display pending count N1) based on the lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S206).

  In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S207), and a reservation ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S212 or S209, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of jackpots A to D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of a big hit D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S217: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes to set the opening command. (S1003). As a result, the big hit effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S217, if the lottery result this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If so (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the process of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S221). If the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / medium-time counter 203r is set to 1 The subtraction is performed (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the process of S220 becomes 0, or when the value of the time saving medium counter 203r subtracted by the process of S222 becomes 0. , Sets a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming status included in the status command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol storage sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment) together with the first symbol It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

  Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with each of the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A) one by one. As described above, ten random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that the special symbol is not in the probable state of change (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a first random number table for low probability time (see FIG. 12A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the big hit type is. . As described above, in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a big hit A (8 round big hit). However, if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit C (15 round big hit), If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed at 81, it is set whether it is the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, or the complete outreach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the starting winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by the various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning slot 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is When it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S411, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this processing ends and returns to the timer interrupt processing. .. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the second entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the value of which counter If is also 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol.

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because the special symbol big hit (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to try to win the specific winning opening 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the second specific winning opening 650a, from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 12 (c)).

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "1-239", it is a deviation of the ordinary symbol. (See FIG. 12C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514), and if it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit now (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the processing of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S519), it is a time saving state of a normal symbol (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1). If it is determined that the above is the case (S519: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 3 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 in this case as well.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

  After the processing of S814 ends, the processing moves to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. After the process of S810 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. The special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric auditors product 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 The variable display is started at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 30 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 31) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14), the opening type according to the present big hit type and the current game state is set. It is determined (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when the opening A is set as the opening type, it is difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2, and thus it is difficult to set the probability variation state as the game state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the sphere easily flows down to the special discharge passage 65e2, so that the probability variation state is easily set as the game state after the big hit.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1007). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1007: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of the new round (S1008: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting process for setting the action of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this processing is ended. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1008, if it is not the start timing of the new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all the rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the present big hit (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is performed. It executes (S1014). The details of the winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1014) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning port (large opening) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1015), and this process is executed. finish. Details of this abnormality processing (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1013), and this process To finish. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the big hit operation setting process (S1009). The big hit operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening ports (the first large opening port 65a and the second large opening port 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotator 661.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening port 65a is set (S1102), and this processing is ended. To do. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), it is possible to accurately set the opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1013). This jackpot end processing (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 33) and, as described above, is a processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In this jackpot ending process (S1013), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, and therefore 50 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203g. By doing so, the probability variation state is set 50 times after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is finished from the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r after being updated in the process of S1202 or S1203. It is set (S1204). Next, the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1205), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If the winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the processing of S1302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1305), and if the round time has elapsed, (S1305: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the process of S1304 (S1304) and that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308). If the value of the motion counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is incremented by 1. The value is subtracted (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1308 that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1308: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. It is determined whether it is 2 seconds) (S1318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to S1310, and the process of monitoring the probability variation switch 65e3 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball splash. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a sphere by mistake and being given a probability variation state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to OFF (S1319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is executed. finish.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310), and if the sphere has not passed the probability variation switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and the process of S1313 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion counter 203k is 0 (S1313), and when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S1315), and the main The process ends.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1015). This abnormal process (S1015) is a process executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether or not it has been performed.

  In the abnormality processing (S1015), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is in the pitching period, and thus the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), this is left as it is. The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), the total of the number of discharged particles (the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharged number counter 203q) is then added. It is determined whether the value) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

  In the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegality in which a ball is illegally entered into the special ejection passage 65e2 and passes through the probability variation switch 54e3 while the special ejection passage 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are respectively reset (S1411), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 37), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a cannot be normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect the occurrence of such a failure early and notify it.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 38, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1616 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous blackout”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), the power-off process of S1616 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1502: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the startup processing this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508. .

  In the process of S1502, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S1616, It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1504, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( (S1506), the process proceeds to S1508. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 of FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the moment when the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after a general power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S1510, the probability variation status flag 223e and the time saving status flag 223f are updated according to the notification content of the status command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). . Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped even after the power is turned on. After the process of S1511, the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed by S1508. Or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509 which is a work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S1510 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1509 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504 when the processing of S1508 is reached through the processing of S1504 to S1506. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variable display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1605 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1608), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1610 ends, the process moves to the process of S1611. In the processing of S1611, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

  When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S1613, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1615), and the power is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 39) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1701). In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is next determined whether or not the holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). . When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol) is extracted, Is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). In the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is set to the main controller 110 by the processing of S1708. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203d, and the value of the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. Even if it deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d, and can be adjusted to the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability variation status flag 223e and the rotational position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability variation state is notified based on the information according to the game state (whether or not the probability variation state) included in the state command, the probability variation state flag 223e is set to ON and the time saving state is notified. In this case, the time saving state flag 223f is set to ON, and when the normal state is notified, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are set to OFF. Accordingly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1709, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1709: No), whether or not the jackpot related command (any of the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command) has been received. It is determined whether or not (S1711). When it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related processing for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this processing is ended. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1713), and this processing ends. In the process of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot-related processing (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related processing (S1712).

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1801), and if an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 ends, the main jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 41) ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1803). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1803: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Yes (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1805, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1803: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1806). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1807), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1806, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this processing ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). This fluctuation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40). In the process of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol. To be done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 56. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, the MPU 231 does not directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. , Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 of FIG. 43) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be surely transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S2102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. It is also possible to execute the processing of S2103 to S2105 after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102 and S2102.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 54A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)). The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When the main control unit 110 is through the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. The content of the image is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305). , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, other than out-of-front / outside) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 50, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation control having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2505), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, while the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the process of S2501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S2502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of 1., and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 23 beforehand From to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2503 is used to measure the time of the fluctuating effect specified in the fluctuating display data table, and when the fluctuating effect in the fluctuating display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display stop type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / out, or complete disconnection) is dealt with. The stop type table is determined (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)) is executed, and the third value is compared. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2408), and If there is an opening command for use (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the opening command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S2705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2410), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are turned off (S2805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S2410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the display command is displayed. If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S2905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits forming the back surface image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back surface types are set to off (S3002). ), The back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the changed back face is changed from each bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is the back images B to E, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2304), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S3002. From the above, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  In the present embodiment, when performing variable display, a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to change the rear surface type is performed. Since variable display has a variable time of at least 7 seconds, it does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, 2 Although there should be no case where the above-mentioned back image change command is stored, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the back image change command. . In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2417) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall person can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2416 (S2416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), And the processes of S2402 to S2418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer region, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 18, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 47B) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3201), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3202), and then S3203 to S3204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3301).

  In the task process (S2304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) forming the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are set for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  In the processing of S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3406), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S3206 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag 233z is on. Yes (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalized display. Therefore, first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S3210), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect changes according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, the stop design of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop design determination flag set in S3215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are cleared by setting in the table buffer 233d (S3217) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3216, if the demo display flag 233y is turned on (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is directly performed. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table that specifies that the image (1) in FIG. 18B or (C) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that it has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is given to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Further, as a result of the processing in S3601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the processing proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702), and if it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the process of S3706 that the transfer process is not completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the on state of the back image determination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the bit in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

  In the process of S3709, if the rear image change flag 233w is not turned on but is turned off (S3709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  If the bit of the back image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back face A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the normal video RAM 236. There is no image data to transfer to. Therefore, in the processing of S3711, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

  In the processing of S3713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The determination in the processing of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of opening types (two types) are provided, and it is easy to transition to the probability change state according to the set opening type (big hit of 1). The rate of ball entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2) is different. More specifically, an opening A in which the probability variation state is difficult to be imparted (the rate of ball entry into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is low) and the probability variation state is more likely to be imparted than the opening A (intrusion into the special discharge flow channel 65e2). Opening B with a high sphere rate is settable. Then, the type of opening is configured to be selected based on the type of jackpot and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is set in the normal state, the opening A is set, and when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is set, the opening B is set. There is. That is, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D occurs in the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 becomes low during the jackpot (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3), while the jackpot A or the jackpot. When C is reached, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 is increased during the big hit (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to let the player play the game with the expectation that the jackpot A or the jackpot C with a high ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 will be achieved.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, when the jackpot is hit in a state other than the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge passage 65e2 is high during the jackpot (it is easy to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to perform the game in each gaming state in the expectation that the jackpot will be won before the probability variation state or the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a feeling that it is necessary to win the jackpot in a limited number of special symbols drawn (probably changed times or shortened times). In addition, as expected, if a big hit occurs within the limited number of times of lottery, opening B is set surely, so at the time of the big hit, the peace of mind that the transition to the probability changing state is almost confirmed You can hold me.

  Here, as a method of changing the rush rate to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the normal state and the state other than the normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is changed according to the jackpot type, not in the opening period. A different method can be considered. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and changing the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to perform and a jackpot type that makes it harder to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 are provided. Then, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easily executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, it is possible to consider a method in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in the case of such a configuration, in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed), the lottery for the first special symbol is executed because the player mistakes the launching direction of the ball. In addition, if the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may be dissatisfied.

  A method of changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 depending on the game state (whether or not it is a normal state) can be considered. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected, and the opening period is selected according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When this happens, it is always in a state where it is easy to pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if the player wins the jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous state, the player can play the game during the jackpot with a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to the ON state in the first round of the big hit so that the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow passage 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the path 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be set arbitrarily. In addition, in the rounds other than the first round, as a method of varying the ball entrance rate into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 by using the openings A and B, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round until the ball can be entered. The opening time of can be fixed. That is, as in the case of the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition of each round is defined as "2 seconds have passed as the specified time from the start of the round, or 10 balls have entered as the specified number of balls". You can leave it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) that makes it practically difficult to enter the specified number (10) of balls, each round will be surely continued until the specified time has elapsed. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be defined in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. With this configuration, it is possible to determine in a later round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player have a longer sense of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probability changing state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" occurs in the normal state. You may. As a result, even in the normal state, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent force against an irregular game method in which the player always hits right to try to execute the lottery for the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening A that starts the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible to pass the sphere to the probability variation switch 65e3 and the period in which the sphere can easily pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. Although the two types of opening B for starting the first round are provided, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the first round period may have a configuration in which an opening type that overlaps a part of the 2 seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state is provided.

  In the present embodiment, two types of ball entrances, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, are provided, but the ball entrance may be the first ball entrance 64 only. That is, you may comprise so that only the lottery of a 1st special symbol can be performed. Even with such a configuration, the opening B is set for both the jackpots A and B in the probability variation state, so it is possible to easily enter the probability variation entrance ball in the first round of the jackpot won in the probability variation state. it can. With this configuration, the second ball entrance 640 can be deleted, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 72. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the jackpot type and the opening type according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the proportion of the high probability state of the special symbol is given for each gaming state (special in the jackpot) The rate of ball entry into the discharge channel 65e2) is different. More specifically, in the normal state, if the jackpot in the first special symbol is a big hit, and if the lottery in the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation state is given at 50% ( The opening B that increases the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined at a rate of 50%), and in a state other than the normal state, even when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, Even when the big prize is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% of the probability variation state is provided (the opening B at which the rate of entry into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is increased is determined to be 100%). As a result, in a state other than the normal state, even if the player mistakenly inserts a ball into the first ball entrance 64 and becomes a big hit, I was able to keep the same as the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence between the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot, and the determined opening type, the type of the time saving state is also changed. There is. Then, if the ball can be passed to the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot won in the normal state, a high probability state of a special symbol is given to the next jackpot in addition to the jackpot (that is, the jackpot is relatively large. Achieves a novel gameplay of 3 consecutive times in a short time).

  More specifically, it is configured to go back and forth among four game states (normal state, time saving state, latent probability state, and probability changing state) with a big hit or the like as a trigger. Of these, latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, and low probability state of ordinary symbols) and probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of ordinary symbols) and special symbols Since the high-probability state is set, there is a high possibility that another big hit will occur at short intervals, which is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol), the jackpot probability is low Therefore, it is disadvantageous to the player.

  Of the two advantageous game states (latent probability state and probability variation state), the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player. That is, as will be described in detail later, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically reset again or the probability changed state is set after the big hit. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. Further, the rate of resetting the latent probability state (looping the latent probability state) is higher than the rate of shifting to the probability varying state. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the probability changing state, in addition to the latent probability state and the probability changing state, the time may shift to a time saving state. In addition, as compared with the other two gaming states, the ratio of shifting to the time saving state is high. Therefore, the gaming state that is set after the jackpot in the latent probability state is basically advantageous to the player, but if the jackpot in the probability variation state is set, a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The percentage is high. Therefore, the latent state is more advantageous. As described above, in the second embodiment, the state transition is diversified and the player's interest is improved by providing a plurality of (two types) game states having different degrees of advantage.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration is that, with respect to the game board 13, the lottery result of the special symbol is part of a miss (small hit). In the case where a small hitting prize winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter the ball is provided, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially modified, and the main control A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, a small hitting prize winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the first entrance 64 in front view. At a substantially center portion of the small hitting prize winning device 650, a horizontally elongated rectangular small hitting prize winning opening 650a through which a ball can enter the inside of the small hitting prize winning device 650 is provided. When the ball hits the small hitting prize winning device 650, 10 prize balls are paid out. Further, the small hit winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit" which is one mode of miss. This small hit is selected in the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol) provided as one of the game states in the second embodiment, when it is out of alignment. It is easy to be done. In addition, since the small hit is one mode of disengagement, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

  As will be described later in detail, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when the special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the big hit type, the opening B is always set (the probability change switch 65e3 is easily moved by the ball. This is the most advantageous condition (passable). However, since it is a low probability state of a normal design, it becomes difficult to insert a ball into the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is necessary to play the game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to perform the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, it is necessary to play the game in the same game method as the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player. Under this circumstance, if the jackpot is controlled in the same way as in the normal state, the number of balls held will decrease until the jackpot is reached, despite the shift to an advantageous latent probability state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the small winning is likely to occur. That is, since the small hitting prize opening 650a is easily opened, a ball that is left-handed and has not entered the first winning entrance 64 becomes easier to enter the small hitting prize opening 650a. Therefore, the game in the latent state can be executed without reducing the number of balls held by the prize balls provided by the entering ball. The small hit winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds elapse or 10 balls enter) each time a small prize is drawn in the special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a firing direction notification effect will be described as an example of the display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The launch direction notification effect is an effect for informing the direction in which the player should hit the ball.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entrance to which the player should aim to perform the lottery for the special symbol) is different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal state, which is set to a low probability state of the normal symbol, and in the latent state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes lower than that in the time saving state, and the open period when the hit becomes short, Usually the variation time of the pattern becomes long. Therefore, even if a ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640, it is almost impossible to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. For this reason, in a normal state or a latent state, it is better to enter the ball into the first entrance 64 by performing a left-handed strike and execute a lottery for the first special symbol than to perform a right-handed strike. This is advantageous for the player (the amount of ball consumption can be reduced and the game can be played efficiently).

  On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol becomes higher than that of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the open period when the hit becomes long, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes short. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, by performing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing, the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed without reducing the number of balls held. Can be run. Therefore, in the probability changing state or the time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the ball right than to hit the ball left.

  In the second second embodiment, the firing direction of the ball, which is advantageous to the player, can be notified by a firing direction notification effect. By executing this launch direction notification effect, the player can easily understand the launch direction for efficiently playing the game, and the player can be notified of the current game state. . That is, when left-handedness is suggested, the gaming state is the normal state or latent probability state, and when right-handedness is suggested, the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current game state according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit and the content of the firing direction notification effect. In the present embodiment, the firing direction notification effect is not immediately executed after the jackpot is finished, but a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. With such a configuration, the player cannot specify the current game state until at least the specific condition is satisfied, so that the expectation that the advantageous state is set is continuously maintained. You can hold me.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol in the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the firing direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no balls have entered the left and right through gates 67). It is a figure showing an example (avoidance effect) of a display mode displayed on device 81. This avoidance effect and the above-described firing direction notification effect are basically executed after the jackpot ends when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is a display mode in a period (avoidance period) from when the big hit is started until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. A balloon 714 is displayed on the right side of. The balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the characters "Aim at the through gate!" Are displayed inside the balloon 714. This allows the player to shoot a ball by aiming at either of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right of the game board 13. It should be noted that the condition that "until the ball first passes through the through gate 67" is set as a normal symbol hit, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened. This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the right hitting in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous than the left hitting, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 by winning the ordinary symbol by lottery. This is because 640a is opened and the ball can be easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right respectively, the balls can enter the through gates 67 because the lottery for the normal symbols can be equally performed even when the player hits the ball right or left. Until the ball hits the normal pattern, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. Therefore, in a period in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further enhanced by adopting a configuration that avoids (delays) the execution of the firing direction notification effect. It can last a long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58B, a display mode of the firing direction notification effect executed when the latent probability state is given after the big hit will be described. As described above, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the big hit, it is detected that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the latent state, when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit, it is displayed on the small areas Ds 2 to Ds 3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to a character such as "Succeed in rush !! Left hit !!". Further, the display mode is set such that the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. This allows the player to easily recognize that the player has transitioned to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, if a player can play a game efficiently by performing left-handedness, the player can easily recognize it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), a display mode of the firing direction notification effect executed when the probability variation state is given after the jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the probability variation state, after the big hit, when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed and displayed. The character inside the balloon 714 present is changed to the character "Please strike right". In addition, the shape of the balloon 714 becomes a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the probability change state, which is more disadvantageous than the latent probability state, has been entered. In addition, if the player can play the game efficiently by executing the right-handed stroke, the player can easily recognize it.

  As described above, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds. Therefore, if the left gate is passed through the through gate 67, the firing direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed, and even if the normal symbol is hit, the variation of the ordinary symbol for 3 seconds By hitting the inside right, the ball can reach the second ball entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the latent state for a long time without damaging the player.

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot is continued to be executed after the jackpot is over, or the ordinary symbol is held during the jackpot. In order to prevent the holding ball from being digested after a big hit (suppression), the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). I am configuring. With this configuration, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the big hit, the fluctuation ends immediately, so that it is difficult to store the reserved balls of the normal pattern. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is 0, and it is possible to increase the possibility of being in the fluctuation stop state.

  If the variation of the normal symbol per hit at the end of the jackpot is in progress or is held, the player loses if the avoidance period is set despite the opening of the second entrance 640. Will end up. Therefore, the player may be dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that there is a reserved ball of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot is reduced. As a result, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the firing direction notification effect is not executed until the first ball hitting the through gate 67 is detected after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively execute the firing direction notification effect.

  Incidentally, in addition to shortening the variation time in the low probability state of the normal symbol, in the ending period of the big hit, it may be configured to execute an ending effect of a mode instructing the player to stop the launch of the ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation where the variation of the normal symbol per hit at the end of the jackpot is in progress, or the variation of the ordinary symbol is suspended, so that the firing direction notification effect is executed more effectively. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), a latent probability return effect, which is one mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This latent probability recovery effect is an effect that is executed when the probability variation state moves to the latent probability state without passing the big hit. Here, the case of transitioning from the probability changing state to the latent probability state without passing the big hit is when the number of time saving times set in the probability changing state has ended. Specifically, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high probability state of special symbol continues until the next big hit. Then, the high-probability state of ordinary symbols ends in 50 times. Therefore, after the probability change state is set, if the special symbol lottery is not a big hit before the end of 50 times, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, and low of the normal symbol) Probability state). The latent probability restoration effect is an effect executed when the probability variation state is shifted to the latent probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latent probability return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed in the small areas Ds 2 to Ds 3 of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as “latent probability”. "Return !! Left-handed !!" Further, the display mode is set such that the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. With this display mode, the player can easily understand that the most favorable latent state has been restored.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, the shooting direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through the left or right through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the through direction 67 may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect based on the first passage after the jackpot finish on the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13. Then, during the avoidance period, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting aiming at the through gate 67 on the left side. With this configuration, when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible for the player to perform left-handed striking to easily enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. In addition, even if the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probable change state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left-side through gate 67 is a win, after confirming the launch notification effect, the right Even if the player hits, the variation time of the length that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 sufficiently before the electric accessory 640a is opened is set, so that the player is lost. You can play without playing. In this case, during the jackpot ending period, the ending effect may be configured to suggest returning to the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from hitting the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and it is possible to perform a left hit before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to lose more easily.

  Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the jackpot winning prize opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning prize winning opening 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Good. With such a configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit left in order to put the ball into the small hit winning hole 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 (prize). You can Therefore, since it is possible to perform a left-handed stroke before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the player is less likely to lose. It should be noted that instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated entrance (trial entrance) for triggering execution of the firing direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the left through gate 67.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hitting random number table 202f and a time saving type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Has been. Further, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e are changed. The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, similarly to the first embodiment, a determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot types of “jackpot E” to “jackpot L” are provided. Among these, "big hit EH" is a big hit type that can be determined by lottery of the first special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. In addition, "big hit I-L" is a big hit type that can be determined by lottery of the second special symbol, and the number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types also has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. This diversifies the pattern of game play.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the big hit of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 24". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 25 counter values that are "big hit E", when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit E". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the game state and the number of times saved will be described later.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 74”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can have, since there are 50 counter values that are "big hits F", when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hits F". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, "big hit G" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75 to 89". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 15 counter values that are “big hit G”, when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes “big hit G” The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, "big hit H" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "90 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit H" is 10, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit H". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  On the other hand, in the big hit of the second special symbol, the "big hit I" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 24". Of the 100 possible counter values for the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that result in a "big hit I", so if the big prize is drawn in the first special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit I". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, "big hit J" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "25 to 74". Of the 100 possible counter values for the first hit type counter C2, since there are 50 counter values that are “big hit J”, when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes “big hit J”. The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

  Further, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit K" is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 15 counter values that are "big hit K", when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the first special symbol, it becomes "big hit K". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, "big hit L" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "90 to 99". Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit L" is 10, so when the big hit is in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is "big hit L". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, but in the present embodiment, a combination of the opening type determined using these eight types of jackpots and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. However, they are configured differently. This diversifies the pattern of game play.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described. Like the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine a jackpot type and an opening type according to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. .

  As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is provided with respect to the latent probability state and the probability variation state. It is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the big hit E in the normal state or the time saving state, it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is achieved in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is achieved, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening B is associated with the probability variation state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F in the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the big hit G is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening A is associated with the probability variation state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot G in the probability changing state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit G occurs in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot H is reached, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is defined in association with the latent probability state and the probability variation state. ing. Therefore, when the jackpot H in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot H is achieved in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, with respect to the “big hit I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as that of the “big hit E to H” is defined. Here, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, by changing the type of opening set, the proportion of the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is given to the gaming state. It can be changed accordingly.

  Next, the details of the small hitting random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not it is a small hit when it is missed in the lottery of the special symbol, and a counter value (random number value) which is a small hit for each gaming state. Is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, “0, 11 to 399” is associated with the counter value (random number value) that is a small hit in the latent state. Of the 400 possible counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, since there are 390 counter values that are small wins, when the special symbol lottery is executed in a latent state, the probability of a small win is 39 / 40 (390/400). For this reason, in the latent probability state, when the special symbol lottery is executed, it is highly probable that a small hit occurs, and the ball easily enters the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state in which it is necessary to hit left, it is possible to play a game without reducing the number of balls held by the prize balls provided by entering the small hitting prize hole 650a. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to entertain the game without worrying about the ball to be held. Therefore, the interest of the player in the latent state of the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, there is no counter value (random number value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a special symbol is drawn, it does not result in a small win.

  Next, the details of the time saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The time saving type selection table 202g is shown in FIG. 63, which shows the specified contents of the time saving type selection table 202g. This time saving type selection table 202g is used to select the type of jackpot and the number of saving times according to the game state at the time of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the jackpot E is set, 50 times are defined in association with the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state. As mentioned above, when the jackpot E in the time saving state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. In addition, when the big hit E in the latent probability state and the probability change state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and of the normal symbol. High probability state. That is, when the jackpot E is hit in the latent probability state, the probability shifts to a probability variation state, which is less advantageous than the latent probability state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is hit in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped. In addition, for the normal state, the number of times to save time is not specified (that is, 0 times to save time is set). As mentioned above, when the jackpot E in the normal state, the opening B, which is difficult to be given the high probability state of the special symbol, is set, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the jackpot F is set, 50 is defined in association with the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot F in the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, when the jackpot F is achieved in the probability changing state, the advantageous probability changing state shifts to the disadvantageous time saving state. Therefore, when the jackpot F is achieved in the probability changing state, it is disadvantageous to the player. Moreover, the number of times of time saving is not defined for the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state. As described above, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the big hit F in the latent state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, And, it becomes a low probability state of a normal design. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, the latent state is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time saving (time saving type) given when the big hit G is set, 100 times are defined in association with the time saving state and the probability variation state. As mentioned above, when the big hit G in the time saving state and the probability change state, the opening A that is difficult to be given the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol It becomes a high probability state of. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the time-shortening state, the hour-shortening state is looped, and when the jackpot G is obtained in the advantageous probability changing state, it is shifted to the disadvantageous time-shortening state. In addition, the number of shortening times is not specified for the normal state and the latent probability state. As described above, when the jackpot G in the normal state, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to the opening A, which is hard to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, the normal state is looped. On the other hand, when the big hit G in the latent probability state, the opening B that is likely to be given the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Become. That is, when the jackpot G is hit in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions to be given when the jackpot H is set, 20 times are defined in association with the time reduction state. As mentioned above, when the jackpot H in the time saving state, the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given to the opening A, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes Therefore, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. On the other hand, the time saving frequency is not defined for the normal state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state. As described above, when the jackpot H in the normal state, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to the opening A that is difficult to be given, so the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Becomes That is, the normal state is looped. In addition, when the latent probability state, and the big hit H in the probability change state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so the state after the big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol, and of the normal symbol. It is in a low probability state. That is, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent probability state and the probability variation state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, with respect to the “big hit I to L” determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence relationship as that of the “big hit E to H” is defined. Here, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time saving provided after the jackpot is made to differ depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. As a result, advantageous jackpot types are changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect different jackpot types according to the game state, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a winning state storage area 203t and a first-time entry flag 203s in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, a probability variation flag 203u is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment.

  The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u indicating whether or not the probability variation state is present at the start of the jackpot, and the time saving medium counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time savings are reset. For this reason, it is impossible to specify the state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (when newly setting the number of hours to be shortened) from the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the medium-shortening counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving / measuring counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t, and then these are reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). . Then, at the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of jackpot winning is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of hours saved is selected from the hour / hour type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately set the number of hours saved from the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the number of probability changes is limited to 50 times, but in the second embodiment, the number of probability changes becomes indefinite. Therefore, in place of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, a probability variation counter 203u is provided, and if the probability variation flag 203u is on, a high probability state of a special symbol, if it is off, a low probability state of a special symbol is configured. And The probability variation flag 203u is set to ON if the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1211 in FIG. 69). Also, it is set off at the start of the jackpot.

  The first-time entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not it is an avoidance period (a state where the first entry into the through gate 67 has not been completed) set after the jackpot is over. When the ball entering the through gate 67 is detected while the first ball entry flag 203s is on, the first ball entry command is set from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 68). (See S612). In the voice lamp control device 113, when the first ball entry command is received, and when the special symbol has a high probability state, the firing suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) is executed. . The first-time entry flag 203s is set to ON when the jackpot is over (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF after setting the first-time entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the game state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, any one of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variation state is set with the end of the jackpot or the end of the number of times shortened. It The normal state and the time saving state have a low probability of a big hit, which is disadvantageous to the player. Among these, in the time saving state, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the game can be efficiently played by performing a right hit, so the time saving state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state have a high probability of a big hit, and are highly likely to be a big hit continuously in a short period, which is advantageous for the player. Among them, in the latent probability state, since the opening B is set regardless of the type of jackpot, it is more advantageous to the player than the probability variation state in which the opening A is set for a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state.

  First, a method of shifting the game state to the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state set when the pachinko machine 10 is initially set, and is basically a gaming state in which the player stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, there is a possibility that another gaming state will be set when the big hit occurs. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% in the case where the jackpot in the first special symbol is a jackpot, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and the time saving period is not given (Fig. 63), and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the latent probability state is set after the big hit. On the other hand, in the case of other jackpot types (jackpots E to H) that can be determined by special symbol lottery, the opening A is determined in which it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2 (FIG. 61). However, since the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the big hit. Even in the case of the big hit F, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 because the ball is not hit in the first round. On the other hand, even when the big hits E to H occur, if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent probability state after the big hit.

  Next, a method of shifting the game state to the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, similarly to the normal state, another gaming state may be set when the big hit is used as a trigger. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and 50 time saving periods are given. Since the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability variation state is set after the big hit. That is, it falls to a state where the degree of advantage is small (rank down). On the other hand, when other jackpot types (big hits F, G, H) are set, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but since the short-time period is not given (see FIG. 63), the sphere is changed to the probability change switch during the jackpot. By passing 65e3, the latent probability state is set again after the big hit. That is, the most probable latent state for the player is looped. In this way, the latent probability state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit occurs and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not hit in the first round of the big hit E, the state shifts to a time saving state after the big hit. Similarly, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hits F, G, and H, the player falls to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, a method of shifting the game state in the probability variation state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probability change state, not only the jackpot is used as a trigger to shift to another gaming state, but also a trigger other than jackpot (when the shortened number of times ends) shifts to another gaming state. .. Specifically, if the jackpot J, K is determined to be 65% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the second special symbol, it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge passage 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and a short-time period of 50 times or 100 times is given according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot L is decided at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (FIG. 63), and the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the latent probability state is set after the big hit. That is, it is possible to return from the probability variation state in which the advantage degree is small to the most advantageous latent probability state. Also, in the probability variation state, if the set 50 time-saving period can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row), the latent state is the same as when the jackpot L is achieved. Can be returned to. If it is possible to return to the latent probability state, the opening B is always set at the next big hit, which means that the number of big hits is substantially increased by at least one. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, even if you fall from the latent probability state to the probability variation state, expect the game to return to the latent probability state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in playing the game in the probability change state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and a short time period of 50 times is given. (See Figure 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is basically looped.

  In this way, in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the shortened time state, but when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot shifts to the shortened time state with a high probability (65%) and a low jackpot probability. Will end up. Therefore, in the probability changing state, a game can be played with the expectation that the time saving period ends and the state returns to the latent probability state rather than a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game can be played with the expectation that the special symbol will be continuously missed. In addition, when the jackpot J or K occurs in the probability changing state, it is possible to shift to the time saving state instead of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal state, so after the latent probability state and probability variation state loops are completed. Can at least remind the player to continue playing until at least the short time period has expired. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state in the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65, in the time saving state, not only the jackpot is used as a trigger to shift to another game state, but also the trigger other than the jackpot (when the number of hours saving is finished) The game state shifts to.

  Specifically, when it becomes a jackpot J determined at a rate of 50% when it becomes a jackpot determined by lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is Not given (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is achieved in the time saving state, the state is basically shifted to the most advantageous latent probability state. Further, in the time saving state, when the time saving period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the jackpots I, K, and L are obtained by lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61), and depending on the jackpot type, 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times. Is set (see FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L that are won during the time saving state are completed, basically the time saving state is looped.

  In this way, when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the time saving state is looped, the time saving period set as that time saving state ends. Until at least the player can be reminded to continue the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the game moves to the latent state after the big hit, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, by changing the rate at which the opening B is set according to the game state, the rate at which the high probability state of the special symbol is given according to the game state is changed. There is. This makes it possible to provide a latent state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the jackpot is over. As a result, when the jackpot F in the normal state is reached and the game moves to the latent probability state, the jackpot F, the jackpot E in the latent probability state that moves after the jackpot F, and the probability change that follows the jackpot E. A total of three jackpots with jackpot J or K in the state will be guaranteed. Therefore, once the player is in the latent state, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction by guaranteeing at least three jackpots.

  In addition, the latent probability state loops the same state with a high probability (75%) when a big hit occurs, so if it is possible to shift from the normal state to the latent probability state, it is a big hit and a latent probability with a high jackpot probability. It becomes easy to repeat the state and. Therefore, since it is possible to expect a larger amount of prize balls to be obtained, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, even if the jackpot E becomes a big hit in the latent probability state and the player falls to the probability variation state, if the disengagement can be continued 50 times in the probability variation state, it is possible to return to the latent probability state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect continuous disengagement in the probability changing state, novel playability can be provided.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is the same as the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 25), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern and the like.

  In each of S201 to S218 and S221 to S223 of the variation start process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, and The same processing as each processing of S221 to S223 is executed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the process of S216 ends, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, and if it is a small hit, it is small. The small hit determination process for starting the hit is executed (S231), and the process proceeds to S217. Details of this small hitting determination processing (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in the processing of S217, when the lottery result of this special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S217: Yes), the value of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving medium counter 203r is stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process proceeds to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the big jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot can be accurately determined and an appropriate time saving period can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the above-mentioned small hit determination process (S231) will be described. In this small hitting determination process, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S241). In the processing of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small hitting prize opening 650a, it is set so that a ball can enter the small hitting prize winning device 650. After the processing of S242, this processing is terminated and returns to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the present process is directly terminated.

  By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small hit winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent probability state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ball-holding performance in the most advantageous latent probability state, so that the player's motivation for the game in the latent probability state can be improved.

  Next, the through gate passage process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. This through gate passage process 2 (S112) is a process that is executed in place of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the through gate passage process (see FIG. 29). This is processing for detecting passage of a sphere to 67 and executing corresponding control.

  Of the through gate passage processing 2 (S112) in this second embodiment, each processing of S601 to S605 is the same as each processing of S601 to S605 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the through gate passage process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the first entrance flag 203v is ON. It is determined whether there is any (S611). That is, it is determined whether or not the avoidance period is set after the jackpot is over, and if the first-time entry flag 203v is on (the avoidance period), the first-time entry command is set (S612), The flag 203v is set to off (S613), and the process proceeds to S602. On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when it is determined that the first-time entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), the processing of S612 and S613 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S602.

  The initial entry command set by the processing of S612 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first ball entry command, it sets the execution of the firing direction notification effect on condition that the special symbol is in the time saving state. After the jackpot is over, the game state set after the jackpot is the latent probability state or the probability variation state by having a configuration in which execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. It can be difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that the advantageous latent state is set for a long time.

  Next, the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG. This big hit ending process 2 (S1021) is a process that is executed instead of the big hit ending process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and like the big hit ending process (see FIG. 35), passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. This is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit according to the situation.

  Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in this second embodiment, each processing of S1201 and S1205 is the same as each processing of S1201 and S1205 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then, (S1211), the process proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the process of S1211 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1212.

  In the process of S1212, the time saving number corresponding to the game state specified by the data stored in the winning state storage area 203t is read from the time saving type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time saving medium counter 203r. Yes (S1212). Next, the state command is set based on the values of the probability variation flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r updated in the processes of S1211 and S1212.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f in accordance with the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1205 ends, the first-time entrance flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and the process ends. Thereby, the avoidance period can be set after the jackpot is over.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1621) executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination processing 2 (S1621) is processing for determining the command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the command determination processing 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in S1701 to S1709 and S1711 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S-1713 is performed.

  Further, in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the status command is received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S1709 (S1709: Yes), the content of the status command is changed. The state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process ends. Details of this status command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. Furthermore, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1711 that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S1711: No), the first-time entrance command is then issued. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S1722), and if the first-time entry command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first-time entry processing for setting an effect according to the current game state is executed (S1723), This process ends. Details of the first-time entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the details of the above-described status command processing (S1721) will be described. When this state command processing is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), it is then determined whether the time saving state flag 223f is on (S3903). When it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state notified by the current state command is the latent probability state (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, when it is determined that the notified game state is the latent probability state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probability changed state is returned to the latent probability state, and thus the latent probability return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (b)), the player is informed that the latent state has been restored (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. Thereby, the player can be easily made aware of the transition from the advantageous probability changing state to the more advantageous latent probability state, which can please the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the probability variation state flag 223e is off (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No), When it is determined that the game state other than the latent state is notified in the process of S3904 (S3904: No), it is not the case where the probability changed state is returned to the latent state, so the process of S3905 is skipped and the process is executed. The process moves to S3906.

  In the process of S3906, the values of the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the state command notified from the main control device 110, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-mentioned first-time entrance process (S1723) will be described. When the first ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability variation state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S4001). Next, it is determined whether the read value of the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), it is not the timing to execute the firing direction notification effect, so this processing is ended as it is. And returns to the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 70).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), it is then determined whether the time saving state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the current game state is the probability change state and the avoidance period has ended. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right-handed stroke (see FIG. 59 (a)), the display right-handed effect command is set (S4004), and the present process is terminated. The display right-handing effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display right-handing effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 59 (a)) of a mode in which the right-handing is notified on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is the latent state and the avoidance period has ended. Of the notification effects, a left display effect command for display is set (S4005) in order to execute an effect in which left hit is informed (see FIG. 58 (b)), and the present process is ended. The display left-handing effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display left-handing effect command, the display control device 114 starts the firing direction notification effect (see FIG. 58 (b)) of the mode of notifying the left-handing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, by executing the first-time ball entry process (S1723), it is possible to notify an appropriate firing direction at which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of game states including two types of game states (probably changed state and latent probability state) that are advantageous to the player. Then, in the most advantageous latent probability state, it is configured such that it can be shifted to another gaming state only by the big hit, and the transition destination is basically the probability variation state. By configuring in this way, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol will be set after the big hit at least twice in a row, including the latent state, so a short period You can make multiple jackpots in succession. Therefore, since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is a big hit, the latent probability state is set again, or when the probability variation state is a big hit, the probability variation state is set again. It is configured to be provided in some cases. In other words, the number of consecutive big hits in the latent probability state is variable depending on the luck of the player. With such a configuration, it is difficult to predict how many high-probability states and jackpots of the special symbol will be repeated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the latent state is shifted to the probable variation state with a low degree of advantage, the latent probability is increased when a part of the big hit (big hit I) and a short time period elapse. It is configured to be able to return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it becomes an advantageous state that the high-probability state of the special symbol is set again after the big hit at least twice in succession, so that the player can be pleased. Further, in the second embodiment, when it moves to the latent probability state and the probability variation state after the big hit, in order to make it difficult to understand which game state, the game state (ball firing direction) is changed. It is configured to delay the execution of the notification (launch direction notification effect) from the end of the jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is over, until the first passing through the through gate 67, the execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided, and when it is detected that the ball first passes through the through gate 67, the game is played. It is configured to execute the firing direction notification effect according to the state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more unclear whether it is the latent state or the probable variation state for a long time, so it is expected that the transition to the latent state is expected for a longer time. Can be done.

  In addition, when the opening A is set (that is, a disadvantageous) jackpot type (jackpot J, K) in the probability variation state, a time saving period is provided after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state of the special symbol (latent probability state, probability variation state) is finished, it is configured not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state, it is basically configured not to fall to the normal state. That is, when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state, the time saving state is basically looped or shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the time saving state is looped, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the game moves to the latent probability state, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

  In the second embodiment, the probability of being a small hit is high due to the special symbol lottery in the latent state, and the small hit is frequently made. As a result, the ball retention in the latent state is improved and the player's motivation for the game in the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, the jackpot type having a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol that is likely to be executed in the latent state, the 15th round jackpot is easy to be determined, while the second special symbol that is easily executed in the probability variation state In the lottery, the 8 round jackpot may be easily determined. By configuring in this way, in the latent state, the number of balls to be held tends to decrease by left-handed hitting, but the probability of being a jackpot is high, and if it is a jackpot, it will be possible to obtain more prize balls, It can be advantageous for the player even if it is taken into consideration. Furthermore, by making it easy to select 15 rounds in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is possible to allow the player to select a game method that dares to left-handed in the probability changing state. That is, in the probability change state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long, the player has a highly stable gameplay in which the player hits the ball by right-handing and does not reduce the number of balls held. By hitting the left, the ball will be poor, but if you hit it, you can easily get to 15 rounds. It has a high gambling property. (If you win with a small number of draws, the profit is large, but if you continue to lose it, you may lose. ) It is possible to allow the player to select the playability. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that matches the taste of each player.

  In the second embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit is configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of probability changes may be limited to 100. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game with a feeling of tension even in an advantageous latent probability state or a probable variation state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game becomes monotonous. In addition, in the second embodiment, as the time saving period of the normal symbol, any of 20, 50, and 100 times is set, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving period may be arbitrarily set. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the short-time period continues until the next big hit. Specifically, for example, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol may both continue until the next big hit.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the first control command is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 upon detection of the first control result for the through gate 67. . Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that receives the first-time entry command is configured to execute the launch direction notification effect according to the gaming state when the gaming state is the latent probability state or the probability variation state, but this is not the only option. I can't. For example, when it is time to determine the game state on the main controller 110 side and execute the firing direction notification effect (passage of the through gate 67 is first detected after the big hit, and the game state is a latent state or a certain change). It may be configured such that the initial entry command is output only in the case of (state). As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, the output frequency of the first-time entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the voice lamp control device 113 side determines whether or not it is the first pass. The current game state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the firing direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to determine whether it is the first time. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first-time entry flag 203v, and the processing of the main controller 110 can be reduced. The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability state or the probability variation state is set after the big hit, the firing direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67, but the firing direction notification effect is performed. The execution condition of is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect when a normal symbol hits, or to execute the firing direction notification effect when the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). May be Also, by combining these, the firing direction notification effect is executed when either the normal symbol hits or the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be configured. Further, for example, after the jackpot, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) may elapse, and then a launch direction notification effect may be executed according to the gaming state. Furthermore, for example, instead of not providing the avoidance period, as a mode of the launch direction notification effect, after the jackpot, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the direction to be launched. Good. Here, examples of the mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize include a mode in which the characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed in fine characters and the characters are enlarged with the passage of time. Even in the case of these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the latent state or the probable state is changed, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's expectation for the latent state can be maintained longer. .

  In the second embodiment, as the effect during the avoidance period during which the execution of the firing direction notification effect is avoided (delayed), the effect of notifying the aiming at the through gate 67 is executed, but the avoidance is performed. The presentation mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, the player may be informed to aim at the through gate 67 by left-handing regardless of the game state. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from becoming difficult to be performed by performing a right-hand strike during the avoidance period (suppression). can do. Further, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the game state, even if the player left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying left-handedness during the avoidance period, it is possible to allow the player to efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent probability state or the probable variation state.

  In the second embodiment, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are provided as advantageous game states, and the latent probability state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be configured to be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probability changing state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, the time saving period is given at a rate of 75% (that is, the probability changing state easily loops). To be configured). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot J, K, L (sort 75%) in the probable variation state, the opening B is set and a short time period is given, and the jackpot I (sort 25%). In this case, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given (transition to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent probability state, the opening A may be set for a majority of jackpot types (for example, 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpots F and G (sorting 65%), the opening A is set and a short-time period is given (that is, falling into a short-lived state), and the jackpot E (sorting 25). %), The opening B is set and the short-time period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped). In the jackpot H (sorting 10%), the opening B is set and the short-time period is set. It may be configured to be given (that is, returned to the probability change state). By configuring in this way, contrary to the second embodiment, the probability variation state can be the most advantageous game state. Further, in this case, in the avoidance period after the transition to the latent probability state or the probable variation state, the effect of informing left-handing may be executed. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from becoming difficult to be performed by performing a right-hand strike during the avoidance period (suppression). can do. Further, as described above, when the probability variation state is set as the game state, even if the player left-handed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying left-handedness during the avoidance period, it is possible to allow the player to efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent probability state or the probable variation state. Furthermore, if the player is notified of a right-handed hit upon entry to the through-gate 67, it means that the player has transitioned (or looped) to the most favorable probability change state, so the left-handed hit is once notified. Then, it is possible to increase the joy of the player's transitioning (or looping) to the probability changing state by making it think that the state has transited (or looped) to the latent state.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, based on that the ball first passes through the through gate 67, which of the latent state and the probable state is changed to the gaming state by the firing direction notification effect? Although it is configured to notify the player, the notification timing of the game state is not limited to this. For example, when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted and notified from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t. This allows the player to be informed of the gaming state at an early stage. Further, for example, a predetermined round of jackpots (e.g., the eighth round), or during the execution of the ending effect of the jackpot, it may be configured to notify the gaming state after the jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, the firing direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through direction 67 may be configured to execute the firing direction notification effect based on the first passage after the jackpot finish on the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13. Then, during the avoidance period, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting aiming at the through gate 67 on the left side. With this configuration, when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible for the player to perform left-handed striking to easily enter the first entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. In addition, even if the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probable change state, if the normal symbol lottery executed based on passing through the left-side through gate 67 is a win, after confirming the launch notification effect, the right Even if the player hits, the variation time of the length that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 sufficiently before the electric accessory 640a is opened is set, so that the player is lost. You can play without playing. In this case, during the jackpot ending period, the ending effect may be configured to suggest returning to the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from hitting the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and it is possible to perform a left hit before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to lose more easily. Further, when the firing direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the jackpot winning prize opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning prize winning opening 65a in the final round of the jackpot. Good. With such a configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit left in order to put the ball into the small hit winning hole 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13 (prize). You can Therefore, since it is possible to perform a left-handed stroke before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the player is less likely to lose. It should be noted that instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated entrance (trial entrance) for triggering execution of the firing direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the left through gate 67.

  In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving state may be more advantageous than the latent probability state. More specifically, for example, it is configured so that the difference between the jackpot probability in the high-probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is small (for example, 1/50 when the probability is low, and the probability is high). Time is 1/49). Then, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type in which the number of award balls that can be obtained is small is increased (for example, the number of rounds is “jackpot α”, “jackpot”) Beta can be determined), if the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the percentage of the big hit type that can get a large number of prize balls is determined to be high (for example, the number of rounds is Configure 15 rounds of “big hit γ” and “big hit δ”). Then, in the normal state where a game is played by left-handed play, when the "big hit α" is reached, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the jackpot type that can obtain a large number of prize balls is easily determined (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), and the time saving state is easily configured. On the other hand, when the “big hit β” occurs in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, the jackpot type with few prize balls is easily determined (the first special symbol lottery is easily executed), and the configuration is facilitated to shift to a latent state. Further, in the time saving state in which a game is played by hitting to the right, an opening A is set when the "big hit γ" is reached, and a time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time saving state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played by hitting to the right is easily set. As a result, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the time saving state or the probability variation state in which the right-handed game is played is basically set, which is most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the probability variation state, the opening B is set, and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, a relatively advantageous probability variation state in which a game is played by hitting the right side is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the probability changing state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous latent state in which a game is left-handed is easily set. Thereby, the probability change state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, but there is a possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous latent probability state after a big hit, so the advantage degree should be low compared to the time saving state. You can Further, in the latent state in which the player is left-handed to play the game, when the “big hit α” is reached, the opening A is set, and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured to be able to shift to the most advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, in the case of the “big hit β” in the latent state, the opening A is set and the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured such that a disadvantageous normal state in which a game is left-handed is easily set. In this way, by changing the combination of the jackpot type and the game state, the correspondence relationship with the opening type, and the correspondence relationship between the short-term and short-term, the time-shortened state can be most advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the player can be pleased by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the probability variation state or the latent probability state which is generally advantageous. . In addition, in a normal state or a latent state that is unfavorable to the player, since it is configured such that a short time period is not given when the jackpot for which the opening B is set is made, one round of the jackpot for which the opening B is set. It is possible to fundamentally make an irregular game method aiming at shifting to a time saving state by intentionally not hitting the ball with the eyes. More specifically, assuming that the jackpot with the opening B is set to give a shorter time period, by intentionally striking so as not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, only the short time period is set after the big jackpot, and it is easy to do. The most advantageous time saving state will be set. In other words, if an irregular game method is performed when a jackpot is hit in an unfavorable state, there is a problem that the game is surely set to the time saving state. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, by adopting a configuration that does not give a time saving period, the normal state is only set even if the irregular game method is performed in the first round, so the irregular The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

  Further, in the case where the time saving state is the most advantageous game state, the configuration may not be provided with the probability changing state. That is, the game state transition method in the normal state or the latent probability state may be left as it is, and when the big hit occurs in the time shortened state, the time shortened state may be basically looped or the latent state may be transferred. More specifically, when the “big hit γ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the most advantageous time saving state is configured to be easily looped. On the other hand, when the “big hit δ” occurs in the time saving state, the opening B is set and the time saving period is not provided. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to a disadvantageous latent state. With this configuration, when the "big hit δ" occurs in the time saving state, even if the player intentionally does not hit the ball in the first round, the player does not shift to an advantageous state (time saving period. Since the normal state is not given), it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the ball is not intentionally shot in the first round. That is, it is possible to suppress an irregular playing method in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent probability state, and the time saving state. In addition, since the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the time shortening state rather than shifting to the latent state which is generally advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel game playability.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent probability state or the probable variation state is set after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, a configuration may be provided in which the firing direction notification effect is executed immediately after the jackpot is over, and the case where the firing direction notification effect is executed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set when the latent probability state is set may be higher than that when the probability variation state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a more advantageous latent probability state when the avoidance period is set.

<Regarding Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described. In the above-described second embodiment, four game states, that is, a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state, are used to be exchanged.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the three game states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are exchanged. Then, in the probability variation state, a loop occurs when a big hit occurs, or a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. Further, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the advantageous time saving state is looped as compared with the normal state, or is returned to the most advantageous probability changing state in this modification. With such a configuration, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, even if the jackpot is hit, the state is basically the least disadvantageous, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a game state transition method in the modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, if the jackpot F in the lottery for the first special symbol (and the jackpot J in the lottery for the second special symbol), the probability change state instead of the latent probability state. The game state transition method is the same as that in the second embodiment, except that the game state is transitioned to. That is, when the jackpot F in the normal state (and when it becomes the jackpot J), the time-saving type selection table 202g basically gives a high-probability state of a normal symbol that continues to the next jackpot. has been edited. It is to be noted that the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set, and if the ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 despite the setting of the opening B, the hour / hour type selection table is provided such that 100 hour / hour periods are given. 202g has been changed.

  In addition, even in the time saving state, if the jackpot J in the second special symbol lottery (and the jackpot F in the first special symbol lottery), shift to the probability variation state instead of the latent probability state. Except for, the game state transition method is the same as in the second embodiment. That is, when the jackpot J (and when the jackpot F is achieved) in the time saving state, the time saving type selection table 202g is basically provided such that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol that continues to the next jackpot is given. has been edited. It should be noted that the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set, and when the ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 despite the opening B being set, the hour / hour type selection table is provided such that 100 hour / hour periods are provided. 202g has been changed.

  Also, in the probability variation state, the most advantageous probability variation state when the jackpot J, K, L is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and the jackpot F, G, H is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol). It has been modified to loop. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set when the big hits J, K, and L occur in the probability changing state (and when the big hits F, G, and H occur). . In addition, it becomes one of big hit J, K, L (and big hit F, G, H), when passing probability change switch 65e3, the high probability state of the normal design which continues to the next big hit is set, big hit J , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H) and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3, the hour / hour type selection table 202g is changed so that the hour / hour is set 100 times. Has been done.

  In addition, in the probability variation state, when the jackpot I in the lottery of the second special symbol is obtained (and when the jackpot E is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), it is configured to shift to the time saving state. That is, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set when the jackpot I is obtained (and when the jackpot E is obtained) in the probability variation state. Moreover, it becomes a big hit I (or big hit E), and when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues to the next big hit is set, and it becomes a big hit I (or big hit E), and the probability variation switch 65e3. When the ball does not pass, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 50 times is set.

  In this way, by adopting the game state transition method shown in FIG. 73, among the three types of states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, the probability variation state can be the most advantageous state. Then, when a big hit occurs in the probability variation state, it can be basically configured to loop the probability variation state or shift to the time saving state. As a result, when the probability jackpot is a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I), it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game is reduced at the time when the probability variation state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately (so-called improper play). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is looped or returned to the probability variation state. With this configuration, when a disadvantageous jackpot (jackpot I, K, L) occurs in a time-saving state, it is possible to prevent falling to the most disadvantageous normal state. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered, and the player to immediately quit the game (so-called improper play). Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As described above, the modified example of the second embodiment is configured to shift to the time saving state when the jackpot type is disadvantageous in the probability changing state or the time saving state. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, a game is played. There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given. As the privilege game, only the privilege game is given (no additional value is added after the privilege game), and as the added value after the privilege game, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. There is one that is provided with a second bonus game that is set to a different advantageous game state. Also, in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the ball entrance provided with the specific area inside, so once the advantageous game state can be entered, the privilege game and the advantageous game state are repeated. Since it is easy for the player to play the game, a very advantageous state is formed for the player.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous game state, the player will fall to the most unfavorable normal game state. Therefore, when the normal game state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the advantageous definite state is completed, it is prevented from falling to the most unfavorable normal state, and a relatively short time saving state is set compared to the normal state. Since the configuration is facilitated, even when the advantageous probability variation state ends, it is possible to make the player think that he / she will continue the game until the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is lowered, and thus it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in the said 2nd Embodiment and the modification of 2nd Embodiment, although it was the structure which changes an advantageous jackpot classification according to a game state, you may fix an advantageous jackpot classification and an unfavorable jackpot classification. . More specifically, for example, the jackpot F and the jackpot J may be the advantageous jackpot types, and the other jackpot types may be the disadvantageous jackpot types. Then, in the normal state and the time saving state, it is configured to shift to the latent probability state (probably changed state in the case of the modified example) by becoming the big hits F and J, and as the configuration in which the same state is looped by becoming another big hit type. Good. Further, in the latent probability state, the latent probability state may be looped by the jackpots F and J, and the probability change state may be shifted by another jackpot type. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be looped by the jackpots F and J, and may be shifted to the time saving state by another jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type can be easily understood.

  In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a game state (latent probability state or probability variation state) advantageous when a big hit occurs in a time saving state, or a time saving state is looped However, the gaming state set when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state is not limited to this. For example, the opening B may be always set when a big hit occurs in the time saving state. That is, the jackpot may be won before the short time period elapses, so that the gaming state can be surely returned to the advantageous gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to more strongly expect a big hit before the time-saving period elapses, so that the player's interest in the game in the time-saving state can be further improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the normal winning passage 65e1 and the special discharging passage 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability variation switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharging passage 65e2 is passed during the big hit. In the case where the special symbol high probability state (probability change state) is given, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the big hit may be determined according to the big hit type and the game state at the time when the big hit is won. That is, in place of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set by referring to this data table at the end of the jackpot. It may be configured. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the first and second embodiments can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning a prize device 65 can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the same operation is set for the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type and the gaming state, but the opening period is changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. Instead of or in addition to this, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. With this configuration, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as long as the probability variation switch 65e3 continues to pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuous without limitation, but the number of consecutive times may be limited. Specifically, for example, the number of times the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is counted, and when the number of consecutive times becomes a specific number (for example, 5 times), the probability changes with the next jackpot. The passage of the switch 65e3 may be invalidated (203h does not turn on even after passing the probability variation switch 65e3, or the probability variation counter 203g or the probability variation flag 203u is not updated even if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on). . In addition, the passage solenoid 65k does not change even if it is a big hit (that is, the special discharge passage 65e2 is not opened during the big hit) is configured as a special game state, and the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol is a certain number of times. When it becomes (for example, 5 times), the flow path solenoid 65k may be in a game state in which it does not operate. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the high-probability state of the special symbol is excessively continuous, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be changed according to the game state even with the same winning type)
Discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the judgment by the judging means and the privilege game execution thereof. As a type of privilege game executed by the means, a type determining means for determining one type of privilege game from among a plurality of types determined in advance, and a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine provided with And a first variable means and its first variable means which can be changed to an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. 1 variable means, based on that the determination result is the specific determination result, the first variable pattern, the first variable means after the privilege game is started for the first variable pattern, Variable to the open position The first variable control means for varying any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern having a different period until being played, and the game ball entering the ball entering means are inside the ball entering means. Second variable means and a second position changeable to a first position where it is possible to enter a specific area and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. Second variable control means for changing the two variable means in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the specific determination result by the determination means, and to the specific area during execution of the privilege game. When a game ball enters, a game state setting means for setting the game state after executing the privilege game to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, and a game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained, To the type determining means And a determination means for determining one variable pattern which is variable by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on the privilege game type determined by the first variable pattern, The game ball that entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position, and the second variable pattern is the first variable. A gaming machine A1 which is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern when the game ball entered the ball entering means during the period when the means is changed to the open position. .

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Some of the conventional gaming machines have a time saving state that makes it easier to win a start than usual as a bonus after winning. In this conventional type of gaming machine, after the big hit, by changing whether or not the time saving state is given and the time saving period when the time saving state is given according to the game state at the time of winning There are some which diversify the state of the game and improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, the lottery probability of winning is fixed according to the type of winning, even if the variety is provided in a short period of time, so the interest of the player should be sufficiently improved. Was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is provided at the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. Is variable. Based on the specific determination result by the determination means, the first variable pattern and the period from the start of the privilege game for the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position. The first variable means is changed by the variable control means in any one of the plurality of variable patterns including at least the second variable pattern in which is different. The first position where the game ball entering the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable control means, and the second variable means has a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the specific determination result by the determining means. It is variable. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after executing the privilege game is set to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. Based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means, one variable pattern that is changed by the first variable control means from a plurality of variable patterns is determined by the determining means. Determined by The first variable pattern is configured such that the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position, and the second variable pattern is the first variable pattern. It is configured such that the game ball entering the ball entering means during the period in which the 1 variable means is changed to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern.

  As a result, the rate at which the first variable pattern in which it is easy to enter the specific area is set based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination means is changed. Since it is possible to make it, it is possible to change the ratio in which the advantageous game state is set according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous game state is a first advantageous game state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second variable pattern in which the first variable pattern is less likely to be determined than the first advantageous game state. A gaming machine A2 characterized by including at least an advantageous gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, in the advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and the first advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous game state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when the game ball enters the specific area, it is expected that the first advantageous game state is determined and the game is executed. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous game state is one in which the first variable pattern is determined by the determining unit regardless of the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining unit. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means, When in the first advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is likely to be set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player when the first advantageous game state is entered.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the game state setting means sets the game state after executing the privilege game to the advantageous game when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than a state, and the game state setting means is configured to perform a game to the specific area during execution of the privilege game based on the result of the specific determination in the disadvantageous game state. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, when a ball enters, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is higher than the ratio of setting the second advantageous game state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after executing the privilege game is set to a disadvantaged game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. To be done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in a disadvantageous game state, a ratio at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is The second advantageous gaming state is configured to be higher than the set rate.

  As a result, when the bonus game is executed in the disadvantaged game state, the first advantageous game state can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the disadvantaged game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game state setting means is executing the privilege game based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous game state rather than in the second advantageous game state during execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, when a game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous game state is high.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the privilege game is being executed based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When the game ball enters the specific area, the ratio of the first advantageous game state set by the game state setting means is configured to be high, so once the first advantageous game state is reached, a plurality of privilege games are provided. It becomes easy to set the first advantageous game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is continuously completed over. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the first advantageous game state can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the game state setting means, when the second advantageous game state is set, when the specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied, the first advantageous game A gaming machine A6 characterized by setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state is established when a specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is established. Since the first advantageous game state is set by the setting means, in the second advantageous game state, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The first variable position at which the game ball can enter the ball determining means and the first variable position at which the game ball can be discriminated by the discriminating means when the ball enters the game machine A6. As a variable mode of the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where the game ball is harder to enter than the position and the variable mode of the third variable means, the first variable mode which is easily changed to the first variable position, and its A control means capable of controlling at least a second variable mode that is harder to be changed to the first variable position than a first variable mode, and the first advantageous game state is that the third variable means is controlled by the control means. A gaming machine A7, which is controlled in a second variable mode, wherein the second advantageous game state is one in which the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first variable mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position at which the game ball can enter the entry determination means and a second variable position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. . As a variable mode of the third variable means, at least the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable mode are controlled by the control means. It In the first advantageous game state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, and in the second advantageous game state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode.

  As a result, in the second advantageous game state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the first advantageous game state, the determination by the determination means becomes easy to be executed, so that there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous game state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latent accuracy due to lack of support)
Discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the judgment by the judging means and the privilege game execution thereof. As a gaming state after the privilege game executed by the means is finished, the probability that the specific discrimination result by the discrimination means is set to the first probability is higher than the first probability and the first probability. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state set to the second probability and a third game state which is more advantageous than the second game state and to which the second probability is set, and its When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a game state in which the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state without being triggered by the end of the privilege game state Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a further means.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine to which, as a bonus after winning, a probability variation state in which the winning probability of winning is increased. Furthermore, in such a conventional game machine, a predetermined upper limit number is set for the number of times of random change in the probability variation state, and if it is not hit by the lottery of the predetermined upper limit number of times, it is won. There is a method of returning the lottery probability to the normal probability and shifting to a state (special state) advantageous to the player different from the probability variation state. If you win in this special state, the game value given to the player will be greater than if you win in the probability variation state, so even if the probability variation state ends before it hits, you will be motivated for the game. It can be maintained (for example, JP 2011-130988 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, in a special state set after the probability variation state ends, the winning probability of winning is a normal probability, so it may be missed over a relatively large number of times. Will be more likely. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the privilege game execution unit executes the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination made by the determination unit. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is finished, the probability that a specific judgment result by the judging means is set to the first probability is higher than the first probability and the first probability. At least the second game state set to the second probability and the third game state which is more advantageous than the second game state and to which the second probability is set can be set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means from the second game state to the third game state without the termination of the privilege game state as a trigger.

  As a result, the second game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means even if the bonus game is not achieved, so that the player's interest in the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the third game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means, the second game is performed at least a predetermined number of times including the privilege game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a probability-setting game state is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the bonus game. Since the continuous state in which the second probability is easily set in the bonus game is easily set by the continuous state setting means, the game can be performed with the expectation that the continuous state is set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game state setting means ends the privilege game when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than in the third game state. A gaming machine B3 characterized by a high ratio of setting the gaming state after playing to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the privilege game is executed when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than the privilege game is executed in the third game state. Since the rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end is configured to be high, in the second game state, by the game state changing means before the privilege game is executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is expected that the third game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game state setting means is either the second game state or the third game state when the privilege game executed in the third game state is finished. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being capable of setting.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is finished, the gaming state setting means causes the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Since one of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the bonus game is finished. Therefore, since the game state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that it is possible to please the player by entering the third game state.

  The game ball is entered in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, and the first position at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, which is determined by the determining means, and the first position The variable means and the variable means that can be changed to the second position where the game ball can easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the one position, and the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising variable control means for changing to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second game state is easier to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third game state. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effect is produced. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is easy to enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position. . The variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The second game state is easier to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third game state.

  As a result, the determination by the determination means can be easily performed in the second game state, and thus there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second game state.

  Based on that the second game state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a counting means for counting the number of times a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determining means is consecutive. The game state changing means changes the game state from the second game state to the third game state based on the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaching a specific number. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, based on the setting of the second game state, the counting means counts the number of times the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result by the determination by the determining means is continuous. The game state is changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means on the basis that the number of times of continuation of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaches a specific number.

  As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the deviation determination result will be continuous, rather than having a specific determination result, and thus to provide a gaming machine with novel gaming characteristics. There is an effect that can be.

  As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a type determining means and a game ball for determining one type of privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance are entered. Sphere which can be changed into a ball entrance means and an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entrance means, and a closed position where it is difficult to enter the ball entrance means than the open position. 1 variable means and the game ball that has entered the ball entering means, the first variable position at which the game ball can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and the first variable position is compared. The second variable means that can be changed to a second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area and the determination result is the specific determination result, and the first variable means and the A variable control for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern that is changed by the means and its variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means enters the specific area while the first variable means is being changed to the open position. The game state setting means is provided with a determining means capable of determining at least a possible first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. If a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is finished is set to either the second game state or the third game state. The determining means determines one variable pattern based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B7, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B6. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one of a plurality of types determined in advance is determined by the type determining means. The first variable means changes between an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. The first variable position at which the game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and the entry into the specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means, the first variable means and the second variable means are changed by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means, the first variable pattern which allows the game ball entering the ball entering means to enter the specific area during the period when the first changing means is changed to the open position. The second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern is configured to be at least determinable by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the game state after the bonus game is finished is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. . The variable pattern of 1 is determined by the determining unit based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining unit.

  Thereby, the easiness of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to change the rate at which the second probability is set after the bonus game is finished, depending on the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are at least different in the period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are the same in the operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that the second variable means is controlled in one way. It suffices to define only variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic C group> (Production that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launch means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launch means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball entering means which is arranged on one path and can enter a game ball, and a second ball entering means which is arranged on the second path and which can enter a game ball, and the first ball entering means, or the first ball entering means 2 Discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of a game ball entering the ball-entering means and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a particular discriminating result by the discrimination by the discriminating means. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon completion of the privilege game executed by the game execution unit and the privilege game execution unit, the determination unit is likely to perform the determination. The first gaming state becomes and before the first route A game state setting unit capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination unit is easily executed when a game ball is launched on the second path, and the game state thereof. After the game state of 1 is set by the setting means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means and the condition determining means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching device. On the basis of the above, the game machine C1 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination by the determining means as a path for launching the game ball.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. In some of the conventional game machines, at least a part of the winning is provided with a time saving state in which a start winning is likely to occur. Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided on the gaming board, and when the game time is shortened, some of the starting winning openings are likely to win a game ball. In this gaming machine, depending on whether it is in a time-saving state, by providing a configuration (instruction production) that suggests which starting winning opening should be played, a more easy-to-understand game is provided. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-230825).

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, when the player shifts to the short-time state after hitting, the suggestive effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation of whether or not the time-shortened state is maintained is maintained only at the end of the jackpot at the longest. There was a problem that I could not do it.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and the first route thereof. And a second path different from. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The condition determining means determines whether or not the game ball launched by the launching means satisfies a predetermined condition after the game state setting means sets one game state, and the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the effect execution means executes the specific effect of a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination by the determination means as the path for launching the game ball.

  As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that an expectation that a more advantageous game state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect is that you can do it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the variable position is variable between a first position at which the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball does not easily enter the second position as compared to the first position. And a variable control means for varying the means and its varying means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, the second gaming state is the specific state rather than the first gaming state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that a condition is easily established.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the second ball as compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second game state is configured so that the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state.

  As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to operate the launching means so as to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance while the changing means is being changed to the first position. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, there is provided a passage means through which the game ball can pass, and a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the determination is that the gaming ball shot by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a certain number of times. A gaming machine C3, which is established when the game is played.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed the passage means. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means has passed the passing means a specific number of times.

  This allows the player to shoot a ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, as the passing means, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided. Gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided as the passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by launching the game ball to the route that the player likes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the first game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and the predetermined condition is that the game state is set by the game state setting means, and then is shot by the launching means. A gaming machine C5, which is established when the played game ball first passes through the first passing means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball shot by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the playing state setting means.

  As a result, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the first route in the expectation that the first route that is easily discriminated by the discriminating means in the advantageous first game state is suggested by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In at least the second gaming state in any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, during the period from the satisfaction of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position, the second means is used by the launching means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the gaming ball launched to the path is longer than the period required to reach the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the variable means is changed to the first position is When the set game state is the second game state, the game ball shot by the launching means to the second path is configured to be longer than the period required to reach the second ball entering means. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied on the basis of having passed the passing means and the second route is suggested by the specific effect, the second ball entering means before the changing means is changed to the first position. A game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the chance of the discrimination by the discriminating means can be maximized in the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine C2, provided in the first path, and provided with a predetermined ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the predetermined condition is that the game state is set by the game state setting means, and then by the launching means. A gaming machine C7, which is established when a game ball shot is first entered into the predetermined ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, a predetermined ball entering means different from the first ball entering means is provided in the first path. Then, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching unit after the game state is set by the game state setting unit first enters the predetermined entry unit.

  As a result, the ball can be shot aiming at the predetermined ball entrance means in an attempt to satisfy the predetermined condition, and thus there is an effect that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

  A launch means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launch means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball entering means which is arranged on one path and can enter a game ball, and a second ball entering means which is arranged on the second path and which can enter a game ball, and the first ball entering means, or the first ball entering means. 2 Discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of a game ball entering the ball-entering means and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a particular discriminating result by the discrimination by the discriminating means. When the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon completion of the privilege game executed by the game execution unit and the privilege game execution unit, the determination unit is likely to perform the determination. The first gaming state becomes and before the first route A game state setting unit capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination unit is easily executed when a game ball is launched on the second path, and the game state thereof. The determination means executes the determination by the determination means as a route for launching a game ball based on the time elapsed from the setting of the game state of 1 by the setting means and the time elapsed after the specific elapsed time is reached by the time counting means. A gaming machine C8, characterized in that the gaming machine C8 is provided with an effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a route that is easily performed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the first route through which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched by the launching device can pass through, and the first route. And a different second path. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The elapsed time after the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means is clocked by the time counting means, and the determination means is used as a route for launching a game ball based on the fact that the specific elapsed time has been reached by the time counting means. The specific effect of a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination is executed by the effect executing means.

  As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation for setting a more advantageous game state is maintained at least until the specific elapsed time is reached. The effect is that you can.

  As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a type determining means and a game ball for determining one type of privilege game from a plurality of types determined in advance are entered. It is possible to change the ball into a variable ball entrance means and an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance means, and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entrance means than the open position. The first variable position and the first variable position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering device can enter the specific area provided inside the variable ball entering device, and the first variable position thereof. On the basis of the result of the specific determination by the second variable means and the determination means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific area compared to the position, the first variable The variable means and the second variable means are arranged in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means to be changed and the variable control means, the game ball that has entered the ball entering means during the period in which the first variable means is changed to the open position is specified. The game includes a first variable pattern capable of entering a region, and a determining means capable of determining at least a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern. The state setting means, when a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the privilege game, sets the game state after the privilege game ends to one of the first game state and the second game state. When a game ball does not enter the specific area, the third game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set, and the determining means determines the specific determination. Result And playing state time point, based on the type of the benefits game determined by the type determination means, the gaming machine is characterized in that for determining the first variable pattern C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type of privilege game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types determined in advance. The first variable means is changed between an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open position. A game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable ball entering means, and a first variable position that allows the game ball to enter a specific area in comparison with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. Based on the result of the determination made by the determination means, the first variable means and the second variable means are changed by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern. As the predetermined variable pattern which is changed by the variable control means, the first variable pattern which allows the game ball entering the ball entering means to enter the specific area during the period when the first changing means is changed to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern, is determined by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the bonus game, the game state after the bonus game is finished is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is finished is less favorable to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means. The game state is set. Based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of privilege game determined by the type determination unit, the variable unit of 1 is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, the easiness of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area based on the game state at the time of the specific determination result and the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the first game state or the second game state after the end of the bonus game, depending on the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9, the determining means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C9, the determination means makes the first variable when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state rather than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is configured to be easily determined, it can be expected that the specific route suggests the first route that facilitates the determination in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are at least different from each other in the period from the start of the privilege game to the change of the first variable means to the open position. A gaming machine C11 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the privilege game is started. Since the period up to is configured to be different at least, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable unit is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are the same in the operation of the second variable means, the gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that there is one way of controlling the second variable means. It suffices to define only variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic D group> (A non-V time saving is given during probability change or pullback time saving)
Determination means for performing determination based on satisfaction of the determination condition and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means and satisfaction of the specific condition Based on the above, a game state setting in which one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which determination by the determination means is easier to be performed than the first game state In the gaming machine provided with means, a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, an open position at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and an entrance to the ball entering means from the open position. A first variable means that can be changed to a closed position where the ball becomes difficult, and a first variable means that changes the first variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on a specific determination result by the determination by the determination means. Variable control means and front A game ball that has entered the ball entering means has a first position at which the game ball can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and a ball enters the specific area from the first position. The second variable control means and the second variable means, which can be changed to the difficult second position, are changed in a predetermined variable pattern that is predetermined based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. As a variable pattern that is changed by the second variable control means and the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area, and the specific area rather than the first variable pattern When a game ball enters the specific area while the privilege game is being executed, a determining unit that determines one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it difficult to enter the game. In the specific area And a privilege granting unit for granting a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than if the player did not enter the game, the game state setting unit does not grant the specific privilege by the privilege granting unit. A gaming machine D1 capable of setting the second game state when

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area in which a ball can enter is provided inside the ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, a game is played. There is a case where the ratio of giving a specific privilege advantageous to a person is high. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game in which the game state is set to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided. Also, in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the ball entrance provided with the specific area inside, so once the advantageous game state can be entered, the privilege game and the advantageous game state are repeated. Since it is easy for the player to play the game, a very advantageous state is formed for the player.

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, if the player fails to draw a lot of specific benefits in the advantageous game state, he / she will fall to the most unfavorable normal game state. However, there is a problem in that the player's motivation for the game is significantly impaired.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is provided at the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the open position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the open position. Is changed, and the first variable means is changed by the first variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. The first position where the game ball entering the ball entering means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means is changed by a predetermined variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. To be done. As a variable pattern that is changed by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter a specific area and a second pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from the plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a privilege game, a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means at a higher rate than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. . When a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the second gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means.

  As a result, the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, is set when the specific privilege is not granted, and the motivation for the game of the player is impaired when the specific privilege is not granted. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the game state setting means sets the first game state when the privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the first game state, A gaming machine D2, which sets the second gaming state when the particular privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first game state is set by the game state setting unit when the privilege is not given by the privilege giving unit in the privilege game executed in the first game state. On the other hand, in the privilege game executed in the second game state, when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the game state setting means sets the second game state.

  As a result, in the second game state that is advantageous to the player, the second game state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set such that the probability that the specific determination result is the specific determination result is set to the first probability, and the game state setting means determines the specific determination. It is possible to set a third game state in which the resulting probability is set to a second probability higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means sets the game state setting means to the third state as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the gaming state is set.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. In other words, the first game state and the second game state are set to the first probability with the probability of being a specific determination result. The third game state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to the second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the game state setting means. The privilege granting means is configured so that the gaming status setting means sets the third gaming status as a specific privilege.

  As a result, when a specific privilege is granted, a specific determination result is likely to be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for the specific privilege.

  In the gaming machine D3, the game state setting means sets the second game state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third game state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, when a particular privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Since the state is set, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous first game state from being set from the third game state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  A ball-entering means that is discriminated by the discriminating means on the basis of a game-ball entering in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position at which the game-ball can enter the ball-entering means. , Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means. The third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position on the basis of a predetermined determination result for performing a predetermined determination and a predetermined determination result by the predetermined determination means. A gaming machine D5 comprising a third variable control means, wherein the second game state has a higher probability of being the predetermined determination result than the first game state.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is produced. That is, the third variable means is changed to the first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second variable position where the ball entering is more difficult than the first variable position. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, a predetermined judgment is made by the predetermined judging means, and based on the result of the judgment made by the predetermined judging means being a predetermined judgment result, the third variable means makes the 23rd variable control. It is changed by the means from the second variable position to the first variable position. The second gaming state is configured to have a higher probability of having a predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

  As a result, the predetermined discrimination is easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the player can efficiently play the game.

<Characteristic E group> (100% accurate change in advantageous state)
It is determined that a specific determination result is obtained by a determination means that performs determination based on a game ball that can enter a game ball and a game ball that has entered the game ball. On the basis of the variable ball entering means, the game machine has a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player and a variable ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter during execution of the bonus game. A game ball that does not enter the specific ball-in area during execution of the special ball-in area which is arranged inside and in which the game ball that entered the variable ball-in means can enter In this case, the first game state is set, and when a game ball enters the specific entry area during execution of one of the privilege games, a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state is set. A game state setting means and a game for the specific entry area in the privilege game of 1. As a ball entrance rate, there is provided a first ball entrance rate and a second ball entrance rate that is higher than the first ball entrance rate. The rate setting means sets the second entry rate higher when the privilege game is executed in the second game state than when the privilege game is executed in the first game state. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is performed by a lottery executed based on a starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set to an open state where the ball can enter, and the specific In some cases, a privilege is given when a ball enters the winning opening. Further, in some of the conventional game machines, a specific winning area is provided inside the specific winning opening, in which a probability variation state is provided by the ball entering. In addition, the ease of entering a specific entry area is made different according to the type of hit (for example, JP 2012-245172 A).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the easiness of entering a specific entry area is fixed according to the hit type, the state changes to the probability variation state when the hit type is known. In some cases, the degree of expectation may be known, and it may be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation with respect to the probability fluctuation state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the privilege game is executed in the second game state which is advantageous to the player, the rate of setting the second entry rate is high, so that the second game state is continued. While playing, there is an effect that it can be expected that the game ball will enter the specific entry area continuously.

  In the gaming machine E1, at least a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided as the ball entering means, and the ball entering rate setting means includes the second ball entering means. When the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entering the ball means, and when the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entering means in the second game state, The rate of setting the second ball entry rate becomes high, and the first ball entry rate is set when the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entry into the first ball entry means in the first gaming state. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by having a higher rate of playing.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, when the specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the ball entering means, the rate of setting the second ball entering rate becomes high. Therefore, in the second game state, the game can be played without worrying about the ball entering means into which the game ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in peace in the second game state.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position where the game ball easily enters the variable ball entering means and a second variable position where the game ball does not easily enter the first variable position compared to the first variable position. The first variable means and the first variable means are provided upstream of the specific variable area and the first variable control means for varying the first variable means in accordance with a predetermined first variable pattern during execution of the privilege game. A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means easily enters the specific ball entry area, and a game ball enters the specific ball entry area in comparison with the first variable state. A second variable control that can be changed to a second variable state that is difficult to perform and a second variable control that changes the second variable means in accordance with a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. Means and the first after the execution of the privilege game is started As a period until the control by the variable control unit is started, a period in which the first variable unit is changed according to the first variable pattern is in the first variable position, and a period in which the first variable position is changed according to the second variable pattern. A first period in which the second variable unit is in the first variable state is less likely to overlap, a period in which the first variable unit is in the first variable position than the first period, and the second variable unit. And a period setting unit capable of setting a second period in which the period in which the first variable state becomes the first variable state is likely to overlap, and the ball entrance rate setting unit uses the period setting unit as the first ball entrance rate. A gaming machine E3, wherein the first period is controlled so that the second entering rate is controlled by the period setting means so that the second period is set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, by changing only the period from the start of the execution of the privilege game until the control by the first variable control means is started Since the rate can be changed, it is not necessary to set a complicated variable pattern, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is a win, an advantageous hit state is given to the player. In some of the conventional game machines, at least a part of the winning is provided with a time saving state in which a start winning is likely to occur. Further, in some of the conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided on the gaming board, and when the game time is shortened, some of the starting winning openings are likely to win a game ball. In this gaming machine, an advantageous state is dealt with by executing an effect (indicative effect) that suggests which starting winning opening should be played depending on whether or not the game is in a time saving state. It was expected that the starting winning opening would be notified by suggestive production, and the player's interest was improved (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2006-230825A).
However, in such a conventional game machine, since the suggestive effect is executed immediately after the winning is over, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on an operation of a player, and a game ball which is launched by the launching means and which can pass therethrough. 1 route, a 2nd route different from the 1st route, a 1st ball entering means which is arranged on the 1st route and can enter a game ball, and a 2nd route which is arranged on the 2nd route A sphere capable second ball entering means, a first ball entering means, or a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the discriminating means identifies Based on the result of the determination, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means are used as a trigger, When the game ball is launched into the first path, the determining means A plurality of at least a first game state in which the determination is easily performed and a second game state in which the determination by the determination unit is easily performed when a game ball is hit on the second route rather than the first route A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from the game state, and determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching means after the one game state is set by the game state setting means Based on the condition discriminating means and the condition discriminating means discriminating that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect of a mode for suggesting a route for facilitating the discrimination by the discriminating means as a route for launching a game ball. And a performance executing means for executing.
The game machine according to the technical idea 2 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means, and the game ball compared to the first position. And a variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition. The second game state is one in which the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a game machine described in the technical idea 2, and a passing means through which the game ball can pass, and a predetermined determination for executing a predetermined determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means. Means, the specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means, and the predetermined condition is set after the game state is set by the game state setting means. The game ball launched by the launching means is established when the game ball passes through the passing means a specific number of times.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein as the passage means, a first passage means arranged on the first path and a second passage arranged on the second path. Means is provided at least.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is the It is established when the game ball shot by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the playing state setting means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device based on the operation of the player, and the first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and A second route different from the first route is provided. The first path is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and the second path is provided with a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball input means or the second ball input means, and the special game is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the executing means. A first game state in which when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing device, the determination device makes it easier to perform the determination, One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be performed when the game ball is hit on the second route rather than the route. The condition determining means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching means after the game state setting means 1 sets the one game state, and the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. On the basis of this, the effect execution means executes the specific effect of a mode that suggests a path in which the determination means easily executes the determination as the path for launching the game ball.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the second ball as compared to the first position. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second game state is configured so that the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect obtained by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed the passage means. The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means has passed the passing means a specific number of times.
As a result, the player can shoot a ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, so that there is an effect that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the first passage means arranged on the first path and the second passage arranged as the passage means. Since at least the second passing means is provided, it is possible to expect the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by launching the game ball to the route desired by the player before the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball shot by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the playing state setting means.
As a result, it is possible to launch the game ball to the first route in the expectation that the specific effect suggests the first route in which the determination means can easily perform the determination in the advantageous first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64 First Ball Entrance (First Ball Means)
65 Variable winning device (variable winning means)
67 Through gate (passing means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
640 Second Ball Entrance (Second Ball Means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S217 Part of the determination means S218 Variable game execution means S305 Part of the determination means S512 Predetermined determination means S525 Variable control means S1211, S1212 Game state setting means S1722, S4002 Condition determination means S4004, S4005 Second effect execution means

Claims (5)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation,
A first route through which the game balls emitted by the emission means can pass, and a second route different from the first route,
First ball entering means arranged on the first path and capable of entering a game ball,
Second ball entering means arranged on the second path, into which game balls can enter,
A discriminating means for discriminating based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means,
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result,
A first game in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easily executed when the game ball is launched to the first route rather than the second route upon the completion of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. One game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least a state and a second game state in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is more likely to be performed when a game ball is launched on the second route rather than the first route. Possible game state setting means,
Condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied by the game ball shot by the launching means after one game state is set by the game state setting means,
Based on that the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a performance executing means for executing a specific effect in a mode that suggests a path that facilitates the determination by the determining means as a path for launching a game ball And a gaming machine comprising: Variable means that can be varied between a first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means and a second position where the game ball does not easily enter the second ball as compared to the first position,
Variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second game state is one in which the specific condition is more easily established than the first game state. Passing means through which game balls can pass,
And a predetermined determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on that the game ball has passed the passage means,
The specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means,
It is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball shot by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means has passed the passing means a specific number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 2.   4. The at least first passage means arranged at the first path and the second passage means arranged at the second path are provided as the passage means. The game machine described. The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
It is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball launched by the launching unit after the game state is set by the game state setting unit first passes through the first passing unit. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images